Home
        User`s Manual
         Contents
1.                                   ANSI ANSI DOS  SCO OPENSERVER UNIX SCO 3 2 2  UNIX SVR4 UNIX SCO 3 2 4  ANSI RS 6000 XENIX SCO  UNIXWARE 7 ANSI DATA GENERAL  LINUX ANSI INTERACTIVE  VT100 220 UNIXWARE 7  VT52 ATO300  WYSE 50 60 120 PRISM  ADDS VP A2 Enhanced REAL 32  ADDS VP 60 Enhanced THEOS  3151 OS2 POLYMOD2  Others    SM9400   SM9412   TWIN SERVER   PROLOGUE 3   TVI 950   QVT119    AMPEX    C332                      The following table shows the recommended emulations for the various  operating systems     IBM AIX 4 x    UNIXWARE 7    Note  selecting emulation sets the value of the TERM environment variable   see Chapter 8 1 8   This value can be modified later if necessary        188 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    8 1 4   Display Parameters    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Display Parameters  and press   lt Space gt   The following box is displayed        These parameters are     Resolution  For information only  This is the resolution selected in the   Configuration   Terminal   Screen  menu     Full Screen  two possible values      Yes   the session is displayed      the entire screen and the character  size is automatically adapted to the resolution and the number of  lines columns      No   the session is displayed in a  Window  mode and the character  size can be customized      Character Size  Only when    Full Screen    is disabled   Two possible  values   standard   8x16  or  double   16x32       Number of Columns  thr
2.                         Note  when exiting the dialog box the graphical settings may be tested   b  Screen Saver    Parameters are      Screen Saver  this function automatically either blacks out the monitor  display  after a certain time of inactivity  or allows the screen to be locked  during the AX3000 use      No  function disabled     Yes  function enabled  The display is restored when either the  keyboard is used or data is received from the server     AX3000   User s Manual 37    Interactive Set Up AXEL      Yes keyboard only  The display is only restored when the keyboard  is used      Energy Star Power Saver  available only if the screen saver feature is  enabled   this saves monitor power consumption      Password  available only if the screen saver feature is set   the lock  screen feature is only available if a password is entered  Press  lt Space gt   to enter the password  For more information about the lock screen  feature  see Chapter 4 3      Delay  minutes   available only if the screen saver feature is set   delay  before the monitor is turned off or locked     c  Touch Screen     Touch screen events  are automatically remapped into  mouse events   No  additional drivers or settings are required on the server  Windows  Unix Linux   AS 400         Touch screen parameters     Port  serial touch screen port  Aux1  Aux2      For a USB touch screen this parameter is disabled    Settings  press  lt Space gt   The displayed box depends on the touch  screen type  s
3.                     ene 213  8 3 1   The  tly Protocol    RE ci t ean 213  86 3 2   The  LPD  Protocol    ede ei aet 214  8 3 3   The rsh Command                    isses either 216  8 3 4   Using Transparent Mode                   sse 216  8 4  THE AXEL TTY SERVER                 sess eene 217  8 4  1   OVVIE M oiii o o e dus 217  8 4 2   Installing an AXEL tty server                sse 218  8 4 3   Using an AXEL tty server                sse 219    8 4 4   The axttyd Mechanism                  sse 220    8 4 5                                                     eph eris 221    8 4 6   In Event of                                  nnn nnn nnn nnn nnn 221  8 5   REMOTE ADMINISTRATION             sssee nennen 221  8 5 1   Remote Control               essen nnn nnn nnn hanh nana n 221  8 5 2   Other FUNCTIONS 8  i        e E o PEE FE Ee lesen 221   9   TOOLS AND                                                                    225  9 1   THE PING                              nnnm nnns 226  9 2   CONNECTION MANAGEMENT                    eene nnne 226  9 2 1   Global Connection 115                            227  9 2 2    TCP Server  and  TCP Client  Connection Information                228  9 3   ETHERNET INTERFACE                                                                   230  O gat wotalus tn t pL RE Ee                   FERRO 230  9 3 27 DHGP DNS      iuit lan ien          231  93 9 S SIallsliC s ih eoi tns 232  GA USB STATISTICS eese e ee ere epe eve e ep e e des 233
4.                 128  5 5 6   Time Zone Redirection                     sss 128  5 5 7   Closing Phantom Sessions                   sees 129  5 6  USING THE AX3000             deer doe eo ees 130  5 6 1   Opening a Windows Session                      sse 130  5 6 2   Information about a Windows 5  55                                                 130  5 6 3   Closing a Windows Session                       sse 131  5 6 4 Turning Off the AXS000               essent 132  5 6 5   In Event of Connection Problems                     senes 132  5 7   MANAGING PRINTERS               sss nennen 133  5 7 1   Setting Up the AXS3000                 sse 134  5 7 2   Setting Up the Windows Server                          sss 135  5 8   PUBLISHING APPLICATIONS                 sse 135  5 9   REMOTE ADMINISTRATION             ssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeenn 136  5 9  T Hiemole CORnltOl iii ni t tear d re rk Aka ede rin HY 136  5 9 2   The Axel Remote Management Software  AXRM                           137   6   INSTALLING UNDER OS 400Q               sccscceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseeeneeensees 139  6 1   5250 SCREEN SESSION    140  6 1 1  Keyboard  TYPO                d          o d 140  6 1 2   Setting a 5   5 510                                 sienne nnns 141  6 1 3   Display Parameters                  sss 142  6 1 4   Customizing 5250 Emulation                      senes 143  6 1 5   Setting Up the Auto Signon Function                     esses 149  6 1 6   Connection Properties      
5.              300   600   1200   2400   4800  9600   19200   38400   57600  115200     7 1 non   7 1 odd   7 1 even  B l non   8 l odd   8 1 even  7 2 non   7 2 odd   7 2 even  8 2 none   8 2 odd   8 2 even    none xon xoff   xany xoff    xpc   cts     none xon xoff   xpc            ees     none cts     high low     high low     yes   no         character string  19 char max      AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix                                  b  Parallel Port   parallel_service non  none   rtty   printd   lpd   remd  Prt5250   Prt3270   tty    parallel_service_name parallel  character string  8 char max     parallel_associate_host vangogh  character string  64 char max     parallel_associate_term ansi  character string  8 char max     parallel_associate_autoconn yes  yes   no    parallel_associate_reconn yes  yes   no    parallel_service_tcpport 2050  number    parallel_rtty_accept no  yes   no    parallel_filter_nl no  yes   no    parallel_preprint_string   character string  48 char max    parallel_postprint_string   character string  48 char max     parallel_associate_devname   character string  10 char max    parallel_associate_msgqname   character string  10 char max    parallel_associate_msgqlib   character string  10 char max    parallel_associate_font 11  character string  10 char max     parallel_associate_mfrtypmdl   character string  10 char max    parallel associate pprsrcl   character string  10 char max     parallel associate pprsrc2   character string  1
6.             eene nnne nnne ena 13  2 1 2  DOV PR 14  2 1 4   Citrix Published Application                                                               15  2 1 5   Citrix  Published Application or Published Server                            16  2 1 6   Senal  Connection  dua deter dites od d dede 16  2 1 7   Set Up                                                    18   2 2   AUTO CONFIGURATION                      18  2 2 1   Stage 1  Checking the                                                19  2 2 2   Stage 2  Sending DHCP requests                     sss 19  2 2 3   Stage 3  Sending requests to                                                          20  2 2 4   Stage 4  Receiving the firmware                                                          21  2 2 5   Stage 5  Receiving the configuration                                             22   3   INTERACTIVE SET UP                 2  eria                      rented iced itas hace 25  3 1   SETTING NETWORK ENVIRONMENT                  sese 27  3 1 1   General Parameters               sse 28  B12  gt  Ethernet IntertaGe tas it die eid e ttd eae 29  3 1 3   Server Management                   sessi ennt 33   3 2   GENERAL SETTINGS                               Reel dite eui ped 35  3 2 1   The Keyboard and the Mouse                   sse 35  3 2 2   NE OCTO a rr 36  32 3   AUGIO    1  roi R   de o Hl a a E aE        40  3 2 4   Global RDP ICA   sisti eee e EP er dota 41    3 2 5   Time Settings    1  iR Ee re LE reve 4
7.            esses 150  6 2   USING THE AX3000     intel totem teg 150  6 2 1   The 5250 Status Line nieee enaar aaea T a aa teles ecrire 150  6 2 2   Using the Keyboard                    sse 152  6 2 3   Programming Function Keys  Macro Feature                                 153  6 2 4   Th    MOUS             poni nd tr ete enis 155  6 2 5   The Transparent Mode                    sss enne 155  6 3 25250  PRINTER z   i rir ete ed aes eee en 157  6 3 1   Setting Up and Using a Prt5250                                                        158  6 3 2   Setting Up and Using an LPD                                                            162  6 4   REMOTE ADMINISTRATION             sse 163  6 4 1            Control i52    id di adii 163  6 4 2     Other FUNCIONS    e e ea ede d o Ya e RR ee oa 163  6 5  F  RTHER OPTIONS       3   2  iro ee oda edet reda 165    6 5 1   Turning Off the AXSO0QO                sss 165    6 5 2   Reconnection                                            166    7   INSTALLING UNDER OS 390                            eese nennen nennt 167  7 1   3270 SCREEN SESSION                                                 i 168  7 1 1   Setting a Session        169  7 1 2   Display Parameters                esses                 170  7 1 3   Customizing the 3270 Emulation                     sess 170  7 1 4   Connection Properties                      esses 175  7 2   USING THE TERMIMAL                   sese 176  7 2 1   The 3270 Status Line    ts Le es 176  7 
8.       Screen Type  options are CRT Monitor or TFT Flat Screen      Resolution  the default value is monitor dependent  auto detection of the  recommended value   The available resolutions can vary according to the  terminal model  See Chapter 3 2 2      Frequency  only for CRT monitors   60Hz or 75Hz      Colors  according to the terminal model  See Chapter 3 2 2      Terminal Name  allows the terminal to be identified by its name   See  appendix A 4 3     12 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Initial Power On      Remote control Allowed  allows terminal to be controlled over the  network   See Chapter 10 2     Session Type  available values are        TSE  rdp      5250        Citrix  ica       3270        Virtual Desktop      Text Emulation       VNC        Connection Type  available only for the following Session Types       Citrix  ica     Server  local list     Published Application    Published   Server  or  Published App  Desktop        Text Emulation    telnet    aux1    ssh        ssh2        Virtual Desktop    Citrix XEN Desktop  or  VMWARE View Client      Emulation  only available if  Text Emulations  is selected     Number of sessions  only available for Text Sessions  For graphical   sessions this number is 1     Note  when exiting the dialog box the graphical settings  resolution and  frequency  may be tested     2 1 2   Network Connection    The Network dialog box is shown below        Terminal     DHCP      DHCP    DHCP   Server       AX3000   User s Manual 13   
9.      a  USB Drives    External USB mass storage devices  memory sticks  hard drives  CD DVD  readers     are redirected to the Windows Citrix server and are seen as local  drives    The USB drive parameters are     Access Permission  two modes are available     Read Only  writing is not allowed but multiple RDP ICA sessions  can read the USB drive    Read Write  read and write access permitted by only for a single  session    Driver Letter  mnemonic given to the Windows server     Important  this box allows  global  parameters to be set up  It is necessary to  also enabled disable USB drive redirection per session  see Chapters 5 1 5 and  5 2 6     b  Keyboard Nationality   When the nationality of the keyboard is not listed by the terminal setup  a    country specific Microsoft keyboard code can be specified  This code is used  when an RDP ICA session is established and allows any keyboard nationality to    AX3000   User s Manual 41    Interactive Set Up AXEL    be negotiated and supported by the terminal     Note  The country code is only applied after a Windows connection is  established     so is not available at the terminal setup level     The RDP ICA Keyboard parameters are     Nationality  two possible values      Default  the keyboard nationality is given by the  Configuration     General   Keyboard  menu  This setting is used by default for  Windows sessions  and if listed and selected no further action is  required   This same nationality is used for character based
10.     273    Appendix AXEL    net _associate_pprsrc2  haracter    n    tring  10 char max      net _associate_envelope  haracter    o    tring  10 char max    net    associate ascii899 no es   no   net  associate wscstname   net  associate wscstlib  haracter string  8 char max      net  associate transp  es   yes hexa                  e  M  character string  8 char max    e  y                               net  associate transp seq   character string  4 char max                                     net  tcp window 1024 number    net  tcp mss 512 number    net  tcp ttl 64 number    net  tcp setport random ramdom   fixed   net  tcp nagle disable disable   enable   net  tcp keepalive no yes   no    net  tcp keepaliveval 120 number     274 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    e  Service Table    Note  Depending on the associated service  some parameters can be inactive   They are unmarked in the following table and commented out in the    configuration file     Available Services  printd  rtty  lpd  rcmd  rtelnet   tty 5250     service name   d df wT vw T      3270    Fe a 2 ER a      2           usen e 2 IE Ie        lt    lt    lt      lt     preprint_lanscape      vw   vw       Jv     postprint_string Jv   ake oe    associate_host  eer ae           associate_reconn     s dE 2   pg   associate devname              associate msgqname                  associate msgqglib           associate font          associate mertypmal           associate pprsrci              associate ppr
11.     Access violation     Disk full or allocation exceeded    Illegal TFTP operation     Unknown transaction Identifier    File already exists     Illegal TFTP operation     User defined error                             For more information  refer to UNIX manuals     Tftp AX3000 Errors     tftp errno  xxx     xxx   s the error number     Possible errors   10  Ethernet board not responding   11  no response to the tftp broadcast request  the tftp host is unreachable  or not correctly set up    12  network error   13  the firmware file does not correspond to AX3000 firmware or is not  compatible with the AX3000 model     298 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    14  the firmware file size is less than 256 bytes  This indicates that the file  is not an AX3000 firmware file   15  checksum error on the firmware file     AX3000 Flash Memory Errors     flash errno             xxx is the error number     Possible errors   0  flash erasing failure  1  flash programming failure  2  checksum error  invalid firmware file   3  segment descriptor programming failure    A 10   MORE INFORMATION       A 10 1   Reload Factory Settings    The menu  Configuration   Advanced   Factory Settings  allows  after  confirmation  terminal factory settings to be reloaded  The current  configuration is lost     On next boot  the Quick Set Up will be displayed and the Auto Configuration  service will be started  see Chapter 2      A 10 2   General Level  Advanced Parameters    This chapter describes s
12.     Axel 20 00 08   amp  CJ Servers IB  Axel 20 00 16       Axel 20 00 17   E Axel 20 00 18   5 Axel 20 10 10              E Axel 20 56 CE  KB  Axel 20 CC 76          236    AX4010   4X3000 Model 75C  43000 Model 75C  4X3000 Model 75C  4X3000 Model 75C  4X3000 Model 75C  AX3000 Model 75C  43000 Model 75C  4X3000 Model 75C       gt  Office 2     Axel 20 13 ED    192 168 001 161  192 168 001 203  192 168 001 248  192 168 001 022  192 168 001 023  192 168 001 024  192 168 001 246  192 168 001 233  192 168 001 245  192 168 001 215       FK21 BV110 TCP X  00295   FK19 BV3Tb TCP FR 0632a    FK18 BV3Tb TCP FR 0532B  FK18 BV31b TCP FR 0632 E   FK18 BV3Tb TCP FR 0632B  FK18 BV3Tb TCP FR 0632a   FK18 BV31b TCP FR 0521c     FK18 BV3Tb TCP FR 0632a     AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Remote Administration    The AxRM software allows system administrators to manage and configure  Axel TCP IP products remotely over a network  The remote Axel device is  selected by its IP address or network name   The software can also assign an  IP address to a newly installed terminal that has not had an IP address set     AxRM is an abbreviation for Axel Remote Management software     AxRM is used for     Obtaining hardware and firmware revision levels    Obtaining Ethernet and serial line configuration    Obtaining network and device statistics    Obtaining set up configuration    Rebooting the peripheral    Remotely configuring a peripheral    Downloading firmware     Entering the interactive set up via
13.     Use this tab to set Terminal Services timeout and reconnection settings         Never X      Active session limit      ever X    Idle session limit   Never Y      IV Override user settings  When session limit is reached or connection is broken              Disconnect from session    C End session          Gyeride user settings  Allow reconnection      From        client       From previous client       Annuler   Appliquer      Enable the  Override user settings  check box and set the required delay for the     Idle session limit  parameter     Warning  an idle session can be either a  phantom  session or real used  session on which no action has been perform for a certain time  for example    126 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    over lunch time   Take care to set an appropriate delay for the terminal   s use     5 5 4   Desktop Background with Windows 2003    By default  with a Windows 2003 server  it is impossible to select a desktop  background for an RDP terminal     To allow a desktop background  run the  Group Policy Object Editor      GPEDIT MSC            Group Policy Object Editor    L101 x        Ele Action view                    e              59  2             Local Computer Policy  B    Computer Configuration  f   Software Settings  a  E Windows Settings  E  C Administrative Templates  5 08 Windows Components   8 NetMeeting   CJ Internet Explorer        Application Compatibility  88 Internet Information Servi  E Task Scheduler  E y T
14.     s _blink_enable  yes no   s           monitor no   symbol mode   hexa mode   s  fctn termprg no yes no   s  nulls suppress no yes no     s _fctn_endprn  1B 4i character string  6 char max      s  fctn colsep yes yes no    s  fctn rule style  horizontal   vertical   cross   s  fctn rule move  yes no    s  fctn localwin yes yes no    s  fctn transp  yes yes hexa     s  fctn transp seq  character string  4 char max         s  fctn typeahead yes yes no   s  mouse enable yes yes no   s  remote cad yes yes no        s  ScrlLockPause enabled enabled   disabled     55 vnc enpassword  character string  16 char max    s _vnc_password  character string  16 char max      s _vnc_prefencod  zrle   hextile        s  vnc cachehextile  yes no     left   right   s  vnc shared no yes no   55 vnc noinput no yes no   s  vnc localmouse yes yes no   S  vnc emulbutton yes yes no   s  vno msesensitivity medium low medium   high   S  vnc mouseaccel yes yes no     s  vnc numpad standard  s         AltGr   s  rdp username     tandard   ascii    tandard   ctrl alt    haracter string  64 char max    s  rdp autologon no es   no      S _rdp_enpassword  haracter    n    tring  48 char max      Naracter           S _rdp_password  tring  16 char max      s  rdp domain      0     tring  64 char max    s  rdp autorun no es   no   s  rdp progname  haracter string  128 char max    s  rdp pathname  haracter string  128 char max      s  rdp encryption  ow   medium   high   no              s  rdp connectionname  
15.    256    A 3 3   Using the AX3000                ssssssees ener nennen nennen 257    A  3 4      iH ob ieu E eye de ELTE RH Le    257  AAA   THE DNS PROTOCOL    Ear t qu dade 258  4 4  T OVOIVIOW   2  E E e e ERR I etel 259  A 4 2   Resolving a                                            260  A 4 3   Publishing the Terminal Name                   seen 263  A 5   REMOTE SET UP CONFIGURATION FILE FORMAT                          265  Hadera EN DN E                266  Substitution Commannds                   esses esee 266  Ethernet                                  ELS RH BB Il n Led 267  TCPE IP Patamelers    itid e fte e rsen eredi 268  Auxiliary Ports and Logical Ports                                                              269  Terminal Paramelers      aite E rie er Ie    R          276  Multi session Parameters                 esses eene nnne nnne 277  Session  Paramlelers  sec densi rie M po Fe ey REA TREE          278  End OF File                   e eva nea desee        degna 284  A 6   SETTING UP AXEL DHCP                                                                 284    621               e need Sonat ea eet oA 284  A 6 2   Adding an Axel option with the Microsoft DHCP Server                285  A 6 3    axrmserv  option  auto configuration                     esses 286  A 7   SETTING THE IP ADDRESS BY A PING COMMAND                           287  A 8   RSH ADMINISTRATION COMMAND LIST                                           288  A 9   FIRMWARE DOWNLOADING  B
16.    Remote  the keystroke is handled by the Windows server  for  example opening the task manager         Scroll Lock    amp    Pause    enable or disable these two keys    AX3000   User s Manual 87    Installing under Windows AXEL    5 1 4   Automatic Logon and Auto Run    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Login Script  and press  lt Space gt   The  following box is displayed     Logon    Application       These parameters are      Retain last logon details  this parameters allows the username and  domain fields of the Login screen to be automatically set up      Username  default value for the username field of the Login screen      Automatic Logon  set this parameter to  Yes  to get an automatic logon   For more information about the auto login  see Chapter 5 5 2      Password  available only if  Automatic Logon  is set to  Yes    press    Space   to enter the password      Domain  this is the default value for the Windows domain field of the  Login screen      TS Broker Authentication  enabling this parameter allows a Windows  2008 server farm to be correctly managed  a local authentication   username password domain  must be performed by the terminal      Auto Run  by default the Terminal Services connection offers a Windows  desktop  To automatically launch a program set this parameter to  Yes   and complete the following fields      Command  available only if  Auto Run  is set to  yes    the program path  and file name of the program to be launched    Example  s
17.    The following box is displayed          server    National  No     lt Space gt        These parameters are     Server  the server to which the AX3000 opens a printer connection   press   space   to get a list of available servers    This parameter must be entered     TCP PORT  telnet port of the S 390 server  Default is 23     LU Name  system printer name     Auto Connection  set to yes     Auto Reconnection  set to yes     Character Set  the possible values are     National  characters are keyboard nationality dependent      Multinational     A specific keyboard nationality  American  French        NL CR NL Filter  The line feed character  0x0A  can be mapped to  carriage return   line feed  0  00   0x0A      Enhanced parameters  see Appendix A 10 3     Pre print String  character string sent before the printing     Post print String  character string sent after an the printing  for example    OC  is a form feed     Note 1  If  Choose Portrait Landscape  is enabled  see Appendix A 10 2   the    AX3000   User s Manual 181    Installing under OS 390 AXEL    parameter  Pre print String  is replaced by the two parameters  Portrait Pre   print String  and  Landscape Pre print String      Note 2  if the auxiliary port used for printing is a serial port  set the  Printer   operating mode and set the associated parameters  baud rate  handshake  etc      7 4   REMOTE ADMINISTRATION   7 4 1   Remote Control   This functionality allows an administrator to remotely take control of a 
18.    Then  select  COM Port Parameters  and press   Space    The following box is  displayed    RDP ICA Parameters    COM    Always Low       104 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    These parameters are     Port Name  redirect COM port name  from COM1 to COM255      DSR Signal  only for Aux1 and Aux2   the DSR signal is not supported  by the AX3000 native auxiliary ports  This parameter allows the incoming  DSR value to be emulated  The possible values are   Always Low     Always Up    Follows CTS  or  Follows CD      Note  for redirecting an LPT port  set the  Active  parameter to  As LPT port  or   As Printer and LPT  The LPT port settings dialog box only offers to customize  the LPT name  LPT1 by default      The port declaration is completed  For the redirection procedure  consult the  next sub section  Then consult sub section d  for remapping procedure     c  Redirecting Resources within the ICA session  To redirect resources within a session select the session profile box  menu     Configuration   Sessions   Session X    Within this box  select  Redirected  Resources  and press   Space    The following box is displayed        Printers    no  COM LPT Ports   All  USB Drives   No    Read Write  single session     Smartcards  No       AX3000   User s Manual 105    Installing under Windows AXEL    These parameters are     Redirected Printer  printer s  are selected through a list  This list is  composed by the following items     All    None    Printer
19.    When the resolution fails  the session must be manually closed  This is done by  pressing  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Shift gt  lt D gt      A 4 3   Publishing the Terminal Name    The terminal name may be registered with the DNS server  This can be done by  the DHCP server or by the terminal itself     a  By the DHCP Server  Important  the DHCP server must support the DDNS  Dynamic DNS  function   To register the terminal name by the DHCP server     Enable the DHCP protocol  in  Configuration  TCP IP   Interface      Set  DNS Server Update  to  by the DHCP server   in  Configuration     TCP IP   DNS      Because the DNS server is updated by the DHCP server the information about    AX3000   User s Manual 263       Appendix AXEL    the type   direct  or  direct   reverse   and the result  success or failure  of the  DNS update is not returned to the terminal     b  By the terminal    For the terminal to register itself  set  DNS Server Update  to  by the terminal    in  Configuration   TCP IP   DNS      Note  the DNS server will be updated only if the terminal name is a full name   ended by a DNS domain  i e  FQDN      By default the terminal updates  direct  and  reverse  DNS server entries  If the  DHCP protocol is enabled and if the DHCP server announces a charge of  reverse updates  the terminal will perform only a  direct  update     For a  direct  update  two entries are added in the DNS server database     A  Host  type entry  containing the terminal IP address       
20.    fixed   enable     ramdom    disable      yes   no                     number                    number     8 char max    8 char max      4 char max      In the following section of the file  for ease of reading the TCP logical port  number  1 to 4  has been represented by the     character  In a real  configuration file  the parameters for each port would  of course  be listed           net  associa    ct       te mfrtypmdl     net  host   net  port 9100  net  inactivity to 60  net  service non  net  service name Usb   net  associate host vangogh  net  associate term ansi  net  associate autoconn yes  net  associate reconn yes  net  service tcpport 2050  net  rtty accept no  net  filter nl no  net  preprint string   net  postprint string   net  associate devname   net  associate msgqgname   net  associate msgqglib   net  associate font 11            net  associa    ct       te_pprsrcl     AX3000   User s Manual    character string     64 char max           number     number     none   rtty   printd   lpd   remd  Prt5250   Prt3270   tty    character string  8 char max     character string  64 char max     character string  8 char max     yes   no     yes   no     number     yes   no     yes   no     character string  48 char max     character string  48 char max     character string  10 char max     character string  10 char max     character string  10 char max     character string  10 char max     character string  10 char max     character string  10 char max           
21.    medium or high      Mouse parameters  PS 2 or USB      Switch Left Right Click  mouse button reversal    Mouse Accelerator  can be helpful with wide screens     3 2 2   The Screen    Select the  Configuration   Terminal   Screen  menu to access the following  dialog box     Screen  TFT Flat Screen  1280x1024    High Color  16 bit     Screen Saver  Yes  Keyboard Only  No   lt Space gt   30  Touch Screen  None       a  Graphical Environment    Parameters are     Screen Type  the available values are     CRT Standard Monitor  color VGA SVGA monitor     TFT Flat Screen     Resolution  available values depend on the terminal model   See the  following table      36 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up      Frequency  only for CRT monitors   60Hz or 75Hz    Colors  available values depend on the terminal model   See the  following table      The following table shows the number of colors and resolution per model                                                                    M85  M80F   M75x  M70x M65C  Number of Colors  24 and 32 bpp yes          16 bpp yes yes      8 bpp yes yes      Aspect Ratio 4 3  640x480     yes      800  600                    1024  768                    1280  960                 1280  1024                    1600  1200                 Aspect Ratio 16 9  1280x720                 1360  768        1344  768      1600x900 yes yes      1920x1080 yes          Aspect Ratio 16 10  1440x900 yes yes      1680x1050 oui          1920x1200 oui      
22.   10   REMOTE ADMINISTRATION                          esee eee ee eene nnn 235  10 1             THE AXEL MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE                                236  10 2  REMOTE CONTROL                cett eee eee c ee e dg 237  10 2 1   Gontfig  ring        i te e ped e aret 238  10 2 2   Operation    tne eei Ede rh ess 238  10 3   INTERACTIVE TELNET SET UP                sesee enn 238  10 4   BATCH REMOTE SET UP 2 0 02    cc cece cc nennen nns 239  10 4 1   AX3000 Remote Set Up                  sese 239  10 4 2   Obtaining a Configuration                    assesses 240  10 4 3   Error Messages                                       eag laap                  dani kaad lie  241  APPENDIX        E EE E        E E 247  A 1   USING THE INTERACTIVE                                                                 248  A 1 1   Entering the  Set Up        iis dee Fac eee 248  A 1 2   Navigation wii idee ede eR eet e rue      249  AM  S EnIeE DIA iic hti e      E RENT    250  A 1 4   Special Notation    erdt tee Lene 251  A  1 5    Exiting thie sSet up   io nre imi a deed e ris ea des 251  A 2   NETWORK OVERVIEW  knaen r r re a a d 252  A 2 1   Ethernet                                                                     252  A 2 2  I PAAA ESS iut ben               N AT 252    283            etd 253                                                              255         FIOVEIVIOW            essen Dace    E 256    A 3 2   Setting Up the AX3000                                             
23.   8 1 No  High  High  None    fissociated Service    None    RDP ICA Redirection  No       The dialog box parameters are    Line Parameters  USB RS232 adaptor only   see the serial ports  Chapter     Associated Service  Idp  prt5250  tty      see Chapter 3 5 2 and below     RDP ICA Redirection  see Chapter 5     62 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    d  Setting Network Printers    Select the  Configuration   Ports   Network Printers   NetX  dialog box to  configure TCP logical ports     Port Parameters    Associated Service    RDP ICA Redirection       The following parameters can be set     Connection Type  always  raw     Server  press  lt Space gt  to select the server from a list     TCP Port  numeric identifier of the connection  The default value is 2048     Inactivity Time out  sec   the session is automatically disconnected  after this inactivity delay     Associated Service          prt5250  tty      see Chapter 3 5 2 and below     RDP ICA Redirection  see Chapter 5     3 5 2   Connecting a Printer    This chapter describes the set up for an LPD printer attached to the AX3000     LPD is a universal network printing protocol supported by all operating systems   Often there may be a better protocol to use  for example     Prt5250  specific for OS 400  see Chapter 6 3      Prt3270  specific for S 390  see Chapter 7 3      tty  specific for Unix Linux  see Chapter 5 3      RDP or ICA redirection  dedicated to Windows  see Chapter 5 1 5 and  5 2 6      AX
24.   Appendix AXEL      bootp and tftp protocol  this is an automatic procedure  The necessary  parameters will already be available from a bootp server     Whichever method is used  the firmware file is downloaded from a host  called  the        host   Following this the AX3000 is automatically reset and the new  firmware is enabled     These two methods can be run either     Using the remote administration command from any network host or    Through the set up of the AX3000 that is to be upgraded     All Axel products have         FK     Firmware key  number  It is important that the  firmware file and Axel hardware have the same FK number  If not the up   date will fail  For more information  refer to Appendix A 11     A 9 1   Declaring and Enabling TFTP and BOOTP  a  Unix  These two protocols are included but not normally enabled by default     To enable perform the following     Modify the file  etc inetd conf by removing the    comment character   from the beginning of the line s  associated with tftp and or bootps  Note  for tftp  take care to use the  public  mode  within inetd conf  the     user    field must be  nouser  or  nobody  and the tftpd daemon must be  launched without the   s  tftpboot  parameter      Reboot the UNIX host  or send the signal 1 to the inetd process      Examples of TFTP declarations   SCO OpenServer    AIX 4 x    tftp dgram udp nowait nobody  usr sbin tftpd tftpd  n    290 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    UNIXWARE 7  b  Linux    Firs
25.   Enhanced Parameters       Parameters are      DNS Search Domains  a DNS domain is used to resolve a server name  or to register the terminal name  see Appendix A 4    Note  if the  Default DNS Domain  is selected in the  DHCP Option List    the  Default Domain  parameter cannot be accessed     Trace Mode  in the event of problems this mode allows the data  exchanged between the AX3000 and the DNS server to be displayed      DNS Server Update  sets the method used for publishing the terminal  name      No  the terminal name is not published     By the DHCP server  available only if the DHCP protocol is  enabled   the terminal name is registered by the DHCP server   Requirement  the DDNS function  Dynamic DNS  must be  supported by the DHCP server  See Appendix A 4 3      By the terminal  the terminal updates the DNS server  In this case  the parameter  Action on Error  controls the terminal s behavior in  the event of an error during the DNS server update  see Appendix     4 3          Router Management    A router is either a special electronic device  or a suitably configured computer   which enables data to be sent across two or more distinct physical networks     32 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    One router can be nominated as the  default router  and then used to access  any network  Use of a default router simplifies site network administration  The  default router is only identified by its IP address     Note  If the  Default Router  is selected 
26.   License Store    This allows the Microsoft license tokens to be listed  In event of problems the  license store can be cleared  See Chapter 5 6 5     3 7 5   Smartcard Readers    This allows the smartcard readers actually  known  by the terminal to be listed   For more information  see Chapter 3 4 10     72 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Using the AX3000     4   USING THE AX3000    AX3000   User s Manual 73    Using the AX3000 AXEL    This chapter covers use of the AX3000     4 1   SWITCHING ON THE AX3000    The following operations are performed when the terminal is turned on      Boot  initialization  network detection        Auto configuration  optional   checks over the network if a new  firmware configuration is available  If yes the terminal reboots again for  the new firmware configuration to take effect  for more information see  Chapter 2 2      Auto Connection  some connections may be opened automatically      Screen sessions  if the  auto connection  parameter is set to  yes       Auxiliary port sessions  if the associated service is a client service   tty  telnet or prt5250  and if the  auto connection  parameter is set  to  yes    If multiple screen sessions are auto connected  the first active screen  session is displayed     Session Manager  if no screen session is connected  the Session  Manager is displayed  see Chapter 3 6   Two modes are available      Classic mode    Desktop mode    The following chapter covers the session manager modes     74 AX3000   U
27.   MEMOR 127 WOOO               OOOO OOOO OOOO 17 21       2 Press one of the function keys   lt F1 gt  to  lt F12 gt  or  lt Shift gt  lt F1 gt  to   lt Shift gt  lt F12 gt    The 5250 status line is set in normal mode and the  following information is displayed        R 256 Fl 17 21  Note   R  indicates the Record mode  The second field is the maximum  keystrokes that can be recorded for this session  The third field is the  selected function key              3   Type the key sequence   4  To exit the Record mode  press   Alt Gr gt  lt F4 gt      b  Processing a Key Sequence    To execute a series of keystrokes that have been recorded     Press   Alt Gr     F5   to set the Process mode     Press the recorded function key     The key sequence is processed     Example     1  Press   Alt Gr gt  lt F5 gt  to set the Process mode  The 5250 status line is  set in reverse video mode and the following information is displayed   the 24 boxes are the 24 function keys  a solid box means that data is  recorded      BOOO WOCO OOOO OOOO OOOO OOOO       2 Press the recorded function key   lt F1 gt  to  lt F12 gt  or  lt Shift gt  lt F1 gt  to   lt Shift gt  lt F12 gt    The 5250 status line is set in normal mode and the  following information is displayed  the  P  symbol indicates the Process    mode   The key sequence is processed      17 21    Note  during the process mode  the input is inhibited                 154 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 400    6 2 4   The Mo
28.   Message  Waiting for connections from TCP IP socket   Initialization is correct and completed  The Axel tty server is now waiting for  incoming connections  Check terminal settings  specially the tty auto     connection parameter   Possibly a firewall is blocking communication from the  terminal to the server     8 5   REMOTE ADMINISTRATION   8 5 1   Remote Control   This functionality allows an administrator to remotely take control of a terminal   The administrator can passively watch the users screen or actively take control  with his own keyboard for various support or administration purposes    For more information refer to Chapter 10 2     8 5 2   Other Functions        Axel s Windows administration utility  AxRM or Axel Remote Management     AX3000   User s Manual 221    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    is available free on the Axel Web site  See Chapter 10 1     The following rsh commands allow an AX3000 to be controlled over the  network   On SCO OpenServer the rsh command is called remd      a  Rebooting the AX3000    To reboot an AX3000 over the network  invoke the following command       rsh axname ax_reboot password    Where    axname   AX3000 name   etc hosts  or IP address     ax reboot   command for AX3000 reboot     password   specify the set up password if set     b  Resetting an AX3000 Resource  screen session or aux  port     The reset feature allows     A network service to be stopped and restarted    To apply new serial line settings  data transfer 
29.   Note 1  If  Choose Portrait Landscape  is enabled  see Appendix A 10 2   the  parameter  Pre print String  is replaced by the two parameters  Portrait Pre   print String  and  Landscape Pre print String      Note 2  if the auxiliary port used for printing is a serial port  set the  Printer   operating mode     134 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    5 7 2   Setting Up the Windows Server         add a printer  select the  Add printer  icon  in the  Start  gt  Settings     gt  Printers   menu      Within the displayed dialog box  select  Local printer   Disable the Plug And   Play detection   Click on  Next      Within the next dialog box  select  Create a new port  and select  LPR Port   Click on  Next      Note  if  LPR         is not available  you need to install  Print Services for Unix   from the Windows CD Rom     Finally within the next dialog box  enter the two parameters requested     Name or address of the server providing LPD  AX3000 IP address    Name of printer or print queue of that server  this is the  Printer Port  Name  AX3000 Set Up parameter  see Chapter 2 2      When this printer is added  all print jobs sent to this printer are automatically  redirected to the AX3000     5 8   PUBLISHING APPLICATIONS    A Windows TSE application publishing utility  AxMenu or Axel Menu  is  available from  http   www axel com      TSE gives the user access to a standard Windows desktop  but this may  provide too much freedom for users to access the 
30.   See Appendix A 10 2    BE    1        E     4 2   USING MULTIPLE SESSIONS    AXEL terminals provide multiple and concurrent connections  This feature  allows simultaneous access to multiple hosts and applications     4 2 1   Opening and Switching Sessions    Opening or switching sessions can be done through    The keyboard  press  lt Alt gt  lt Fx gt   These default keystrokes can be  changed  see Chapter 3 6 3      The mouse  click left     With the session manager  desktop mode   click onto a session icon     AX3000   User s Manual TT    Using the AX3000 AXEL      With the status sine  click the session label   The status line must be  enabled   see Chapter 3 6 2   and the mouse be supported by the  current session      Note  if the session is  host free   a dialog box is displayed  The following  parameters are required      Connection Type  read only information      Host  press  lt Space gt  to select the host     TCP Port  the default value is protocol dependent    4 2 2   Disconnecting Sessions    A session can be disconnected by one of following ways     A system command  ie logging off the server   Example  under Unix  exit  or  lt Ctrl gt  lt D gt        lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt D gt   This keystroke is locally processed by the AX3000 and  works regardless the operating system     The status line  key  icon    If the user closes the current session   lt Ctrl gt  lt D gt  in UNIX  the behavior of the  terminal depends on how the  auto reconnection  parameter is se
31.   Service and RDP redirection conflict     Command  setup send   Cause  an auxiliary port is used by both the RDP redirection and by  a network service    Consequence  the auxiliary port doesn t work properly    Solution  the conflict must be fixed     AX3000   User s Manual 245    AXEL Appendix    APPENDIX    AX3000   User s Manual 247    Appendix AXEL    The following appendices give information about   A 1   Using the AX3000 interactive set up  A 2   Network overview  Ethernet address  IP address and routers           DHCP protocol  A 4   DNS protocol     5   Remote set up configuration file format  A 7   Setting the IP address by a ping command  A 8   Administration command list  A 9   Firmware downloading     10   Going further     A 11   Hardware and firmware information    A 1   USING THE INTERACTIVE SET UP    A 1 1   Entering the Set Up    The following can be used to enter the AX3000 interactive set up     Using  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Esc gt  from the terminal    Using the AxRM remote control command  See Chapters 10 1 and 10 2     Using Telnet to access the terminal remotely   See Chapter 10 3      Note  the set up can be password protected  in which case the password must    be entered to access the quick set up dialog box  For more information  see  Chapter 3 2 7     248 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    A 1 2   Navigation    The AX3000 set up comprises a horizontal general menu  with drop down  vertical menus     The mouse cannot be used within the t
32.   TCP IP  network environment    AUX  Port  port service and communication parameters   Parallel Port  port service    Usb  Port  port service    Net  Port  port service    Terminal  global parameters  screen  keyboard  etc    Multi session    session numbers  hot keys  etc   Session 96  session parameters     Several formats are available for set up parameter values     List  the possible values are listed  the character     is  used as a separator   Example   yes   no     Number  maximum and minimum values are given    IP address format  the IP address format is a b c d    Character string  maximum length is given     Note  an ASCII character can be represented by  its hexadecimal ASCII code  preceded by a  backslash character  e g   MB represents Escape  and    represents a backslash      AX3000   User s Manual 265    Appendix AXEL    8 color format  the 8 available colors are black  red  green  brown   blue  magenta  cyan and white    16 color format  the 8 additional available colors are grey   It magenta  It green  hi white  It blue  It red  It cyan  and yellow    Resolution  a resolution is encoded as WxH FHz     Examples  800x600 60Hz or 1440x900 75Hz     In the following parameter lists  the possible values are bracketed after each  set up parameter     A configuration file can either be created using a text editor  or obtained from an  already configured TCP IP AX3000  by using setup get remote commana      When a configuration file is obtained from an AX3000  the i
33.   Text  type entry  containing the terminal signature     For a  reverse  update  one entry is added  a  Pointer  type entry  containing  the terminal   s full name     Note  the signature allows the terminal to check its  Host  type entry  If the  check fails  i e  no associated signature or wrong associated signature  the  terminal   s behavior during the DNS server update depends on the value of the  set up parameter  Action on Error   see Chapter 3 1      Display an error  a red dialog box is displayed  The user may reboot the  terminal or enter the set up     Continue the update  the entries   Host    Text  and  Pointer   are  overwritten    Cancel the update  the DNS update is aborted but the terminal is  available for use     The type   direct  or  direct   reverse   and the result  success or failure  of the    DNS update are returned to the terminal and are available in the terminal set   up  See chapter 9 3     264 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    A 5   REMOTE SET UP CONFIGURATION FILE FORMAT    A configuration file can list some or all AX3000 set up parameters     The configuration file begins with the header label  BEGIN_AX_SETUP  and  ends with the trailer label  END_AX_SETUP                  Example     BEGIN_AX_SETUP V1 1    this is a comment    tcp hostl name vangogh       END AX SETUP    Note  lines beginning with     are treated as comments and ignored     The set up parameters may be grouped as follows     Ethernet  Ethernet interface parameters  
34.   fiuto Configuration  Factory settings  Licence store  Smartcard Readers  3 7 1   Tuning       This box offers special terminal operating parameters  Usually the default    values are suitable     For more information see Appendix A 10 2     3 7 2   Auto Configuration    The Auto Configuration function lets a terminal check if new firmware and or    new configuration files are available     This function is automatically started when the terminal is powered on for the    very first time  See Chapter 2 2     AX3000   User s Manual    71    Interactive Set Up AXEL    Additionally this function can also be set to run each time the terminal boots       xRM Server Localisation       The  time out  parameter is the maximum number of seconds allowed for the  terminal to load a new firmware configuration  If nothing is received in this time  the terminal boots up using existing current settings     Two methods are available for the terminal to locate the AxRM server  IP  address and TCP port      Static  the IP address  or the name  and the TCP port are entered    Dynamic  only if DHCP is already used to get the terminal IP address    the IP address and TCP port are given through the DHCP protocol  see  Chapter 2 2 3 for more information    For more information about Auto Configuration stages  refer to Chapter 2 2   3 7 3   Factory Settings    This allows  after confirmation  terminal factory settings to be reloaded  The  current configuration is lost  See Appendix A 10 1     3 7 4 
35.   telnet naws yes   s  initstring   s _answerback   s  _screen_overscan 09  s  screen codepage 437      Screen column 80     Screen line 25     Screen scroll yes     Screen wrap yes     Screen crlf yes     SCreen cursor block    Screen enhanced no    Screen attbmode    ignore blank no     kbd  code scancode    An HD HA HHA AHN A NA       X      o  AP      X V oe    oe     kbd capsmode caps lock  s  kbd localcompose no    55 kbd special  s  eurocode     AX3000   User s Manual    character string   character string   character string   character string   character string   character string   character string   character string        character string   number    number    number    ramdom   fixed   disable   enable   yes   no    number    none   break   IP  yes   no   character string   character string                                                                  n       437   850   860            10 char max    60 char max    60 char max    10 char max    30 char max    10 char max    10 char max    10 char max    10 char max    AO     8 char max    10 char max        number in range 0 to 63     8859   8859 sg          dec multi   iso 7 sm9400  ato300   greek   861   857     80   132     25   24 1    n   no     yes   no     yes   no     line   half block   block    no   doublesize   underline   RAE white   color     yes   no     ascii   scancode     caps lock   shift lock    uppercase     no   remote   local     yes   no     no   euro ASCII code     279    Appendix AXEL   
36.   to set display settings  For more  information  see the next chapter      Additional Parameters  pressing   Space   displays a dialog box which  lets certain emulation parameters be changed  See Chapter 7 1 3      Key Mapping  pressing   Space   displays a dialog box which lets         keys be remapped  See Chapter 7 1 3      Palette  pressing   Space   displays a dialog box which lets emulation  colors be remapped  See Chapter 7 1 3     Save and exit the set up  The AX3000 is ready for use     AX3000   User s Manual 169    Installing under OS 390 AXEL    7 1 2   Display Parameters    Within the  Session Profile    box  select  Display Parameters  and press   lt Space gt   The following box is displayed        These parameters are     Resolution  For information only  This is the resolution selected in the   Configuration   Terminal   Screen  menu     Full Screen  two possible values      Yes   the session is displayed      the entire screen and the character  size is automatically adapted to the resolution and the number of  lines columns      No   the session is displayed in     Window  mode and the character  size can be customized      Character Size  Only when  Full Screen  is disabled   Two possible  values   standard   8x16  or  double   16x32      Note  for more information  please refer to Appendix A 10 5     7 1 3   Customizing the 3270 Emulation    Various 3270 emulation parameters can be modified but generally the default  values are the most suitable     To cus
37.   yes   no     yes   no     low   medium   high   maximal    all   click     none   all   xxx     no   xxx    dee   all   xxx     yes   no     yes   no    id   no     I   Name    tls    character string  64 char max    yes   no     character string  48 char max    character string  16 char max    character string  64 char max    no   low   medium   high    TEA   RC5  128 logon      RC5  40    RC5  56    RC5  128      character string  20 char max    yes no     yes no     none   all   xxx     yes no     none   all   xxx     yes no     yes no     yes no     yes no     low medium   high     yes no     yes no     all click     low medium   high   maximal    yes no     yes no     yes no        AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    s  _vdk_theme  yes no   s _color_mode yes yes no   enhanced     s  normal foregrnd lt green 16 color format     s  normal backgrnd black 8 color format        s  reverse foregrnd lt red 16 color format     s  reverse backgrnd white 8 color format        s  underscore foregrnd yellow 16 color format     S  underscore backgrnd black 8 color format           s  graphics foregrnd hi whit 16 color format     s  graphics backgrnd magenta 8 color format     d s  enhanced foregrndxxx white  16 color format                             d s  enhanced backgrndxxx blue  16 color format     s  enhanced blinkxxx no  yes no     s  enhanced underlxxx no  yes no    s  palette   number from de 0 to 63    s  black  number from de 0 to 63    s  grey  number from de 0 to
38.  2   Installing an AXEL tty server    Copy to  etc and rename as axttyd the appropriate binary  Example for IBM  AIX       cp axttyd AIX  etc axttyd  lt CR gt     Note  the source file and the makefile are also provided  If the binary file  required for your operating system is not provided  it can be generated     Copy the AXEL association file  axfile  into the  etc directory     To launch the AXEL tty server automatically  whenever the host is booted  copy  into the boot directory the S91axel file  for Unix  or the S91axtty file  for Linux      The S91axel or S91axtty files launch the AXEL tty server  If parameters other  than the default are required  this command line can be edited     218 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    8 4 3   Using an AXEL tty server    a  Overview    The AXEL tty server uses a configuration file which lists all authorized  associations between AX3000 resources and UNIX pttys  Each entry in this file  contains four parameters     AX3000 hostname  see  etc hosts     The AX3000 resource  which depends on which network service is used     tty on terminal session  sess1  sess2       sess6    tty on auxiliary port  aux1  aux2 and parallel     tty on logical USB port  usb1  usb2  usb3 and usb4     tty on logical TCP port  net1 and net2     rtty  encoded by a TCP port    The master file of the ptty   dev ptty or  dev ptmx     The slave file of the ptty   dev ttyp   dev pts xxx or a link file automatically  created by axttyd     
39.  63    st white  number from de 0 to 63    s  tab  X X X X X X X  char string  132 max   X tabu     s  udk f   character string  32 char max     st        ins  character string  32 char max     s  udk end  character string  32 char max     s  udk dn  character string  32 char max     s  udk pgdn  character string  32 char max     s  udk left  character string  32 char max     s  udk five  character string  32 char max     s  udk right  character string  32 char max     s  udk home  character string  32 char max     s  udk up  character string  32 char max     s  udk pgup  character string  32 char max     s  udk minus  character string  32 char max     s  udk plus  character string  32 char max     s  udk del  character string  32 char max     s  udk esc  character string  32 char max     s  udk dot  sod    s  udk backspace   08   N7F   ansi   sm9400    s  idk backspace Standard  Standard   backspace    s  seq modifier   alt   shift   control        AX3000   User s Manual 283    Appendix AXEL    s _seq_scan    character string  20 char max    S  seq string    character string  256 char max    S  seq cmd   5250 functions    Notes       The  5  predefined setup  parameter automatically sets all the session  parameters with proper values      When the configuration file is obtained from an already configured AX3000   non significant parameters are commented out     End of File    The configuration file must be ended with the following trailer label   END AX SETUP          If thi
40.  AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    3 5 6   Other Uses  a  Using rtty    With the rtty service  the AX3000 acts as a server  The AX3000  listens  on a  given TCP port  Then  a connection can be established from a Windows or Unix  box to send or received data     Note  the rtty service can also be used with the Axel daemon  axttyd  under  UNIX  see Chapter 8 4      To set the rtty service on the port  enter the following parameters in the   Configuration   Ports   xxx   yyy  dialog box      Service  select rtty      Parameters  press  lt Space gt  to access the following box     No  No     lt Space gt          Port TCP  numeric value associates to this auxiliary port      NL CR NL Filter  The line feed character 0x0A can be mapped to  carriage return   line feed 0  00 Ox0A      Always Accept New Connection  set the AX3000 behavior when an  rtty connection is already established and a second connection rtty is  received      Enhanced parameters  see Appendix A 10 3      Pre print String  character string sent before the printing     Post print String  character string sent after an the printing  for  example  OC  is    form feed     Note  If  Choose Portrait Landscape  is enabled  see Appendix A 10 2   the    parameter  Pre print String  is replaced by the two parameters  Portrait Pre   print String  and  Landscape Pre print String      AX3000   User s Manual 67    Interactive Set Up AXEL    b  Using the rsh Command to Print    The embedded rcmd service allows
41.  App  Desktop  activates the status line  allowing sessions to be changed with the mouse     AX3000   User s Manual 111    Installing under Windows AXEL    5 3 2   Desktop Parameters    Within the  Session Profile    box  select  Desktop Parameters  and press   lt Space gt   The following box is displayed     Application Manager    Messages Translation       These parameters are      Auto Exec Single Application  in event of only one application is  published  this parameters allows to run it automatically      Automatic Session Reconnection  this parameters  also known as   smooth roaming   allows a user to retrieve his former sessions when  reconnection from another workstation  The reconnected session type  can be  disconnected  or  disconnected and actives       Filter  Description must contain  this allows displaying only published  applications with a description field including the entered character string        Applications   label  customized label for the  Applications  message  located on the upper left corner  see screen shot at the next chapter        Close session   label  customized label for the  Close session   message located on the lower left corner  see screen shot at the next  chapter      112 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    5 3 3   Using the  Published App  Desktop     a  Authentication    On establishing the  Published App  Desktop   authentication is requested    Username  password and domain   A local dialog box requests th
42.  As 400 will be unaware  the connection is broken and will still consider the connection to be valid and in  use  If the terminal then tries to sign on with the same devname the As 400 will  refuse connection     This problem can be solved by tuning  keepalive  function of the OS 400 Telnet  Server  The keepalive function allows sessions to time out and die after a  certain time  Keepalive probes are automatically sent by the OS 400 host when  a connection has been idle for a specified time  If the TCP IP peripheral does  not respond  the connection is dropped  The socket is released and applications  associated with the connection are killed     Note  to check the status of sockets  use the OS 400 net stat command     By default  the keepalive time out value is very high  sometimes infinite   So this  value must be decreased to allow the OS 400 to check regularly the TCP IP  connection status  Invoke the following command to change this value  xxx are  seconds          gt  CHGTELNA TIMMRKTIMO  xxx     This modification will take effect after restarting the telnet server       gt  ENDTCPSVR SERVER    TELNET       gt  STRICPSVR SERVER    TELNET     IMPORTANT  using a small keepalive value can prevent routers from dropping  the ISDN line and cause high connection bills     166 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 390       INSTALLING UNDER OS 390    AX3000   User s Manual 167    Installing under OS 390 AXEL    This chapter covers AX3000 installation under OS 390 z
43.  Citrix published applications or other emulations   i e  RDP  Telnet  As400         Within the  Published App  Desktop  dialog box the number of Citrix  published applications is set  1 to 5   If 5 is selected all sessions are  reserved for Citrix     if however 3 are selected 2 sessions are available for  non Citrix connections  The total cannot exceed 5      The Citrix published application sessions are always set up descending  from session number 6  so in the above example sessions 6  5  4 will be  published applications   and sessions 3 and 2 available for other non   Citrix environments   Only one session  Published App  Desktop  session  is possible per terminal    AX3000   User s Manual 109       Installing under Windows AXEL    To illustrate this principle below are three examples of session setup    Example 1  terminal dedicated to  Published App  Desktop              5250 Pub  App   Desktop             Example 3   Published App  Desktop   VNC and ANSI sessions          Pub  App  VNC ANSI  Desktop                To configure the  Published App  Desktop  session  enter   lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Esc gt     select the  Configuration   Sessions   Session X  menu  where X is the  number of the session  The dialog box below is displayed     Session 1 Profile     Connection Parameters  Citrix Cica   Published App  Desktop   lt Space gt    lt Space gt    lt Space gt    lt Space gt   Session Parameters  5   lt Space gt    lt Space gt    lt Space gt     CANCEL       Enter 
44.  For example     Resource Master Slave  auxl  dev ptyp12  dev ttyp12  aux2  dev ptmx  dev pts 13    2050  dev ptyp0  dev ttyp0  sessi  dev ptmx  dev axel  sess2  dev ptyp2  dev ttyp2       Notes     Lines beginning with     are ignored     Association lines 1  2  4 and 5 use the tty service  and association line 3  uses rtty service     Association line 4 uses a link file   dev axel   This file is linked with an  undefined slave ttyp   dev pts xxx   This link file is automatically created  when axttyd is run     Errors  syntax error  unknown AX3000 hostname  ptty not available  etc  are  recorded in a log file     AX3000   User s Manual 219    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    b  Running the Axel Tty Server    The command to start the AXEL tty server is      etc axttyd   f file    1 log    n port    hbFUk   amp    b  use a buffer for received data    f  configuration file  default   etc axfile                buffers are flushed when the tty connection is established    h  on line help    1 log file  default   tmp axttylog     n  TCP port  default  2048  for connections using the tty service    U  only unidirectional dataflow is supported  Data from the network is  dropped    k  turn off keepalive function     Note  take care to add the   amp   character at the end of line     The AXEL tty server can be started either from the UNIX command line or at  boot time  from S91axel or S91axtty           authorized associations  connections and disconnections will be recorded in  th
45.  Initial Power On AXEL    The parameters are     Enable DHCP  two options     Yes  the DHCP protocol is run when the set up is exited and the  terminal automatically obtains an IP address and various other  DHCP options  netmask  default router  etc      No  a Static IP address is required    IP address  mandatory if DHCP is disabled     Default router  optional router IP address     151 DNS Server IP Address  optional DNS server IP address    Server Name  not available for Citrix   DNS name  if the DNS server is  known  or a simple mnemonic name   a name must be entered     Server IP address  not available for Citrix   if this field is left blank  DNS  will be used to resolve the hostname     TCP Port  only for VNC   VNC session number    Note  for a  Virtual Desktop  session  the server is the  Connection Broker     For more information about DHCP and DNS  please refer to appendices A 3  and A 4     2 1 3   Devices    This box is displayed for the all networked session types     Printer    USB Drives    Disabled       14 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Initial Power On    These parameters are     Printer Connected  auxiliary port where printer is attached  none  aux1   aux2  parallel  USB1      Protocol  LPD  TSE  Prt5250 or Prt3270  The next parameters are  protocol dependent     LPD  Queue Name  name given to the auxiliary port     TSE  Printer Name and Windows TSE Driver    Prt5250  Printer Name and Driver  printer type and model     Prt3270  Printer Name    Access Permis
46.  Limit maximum color depth  Allow users to connect remotely using Terminal Services  Do not allow local administrators to customize permissions  ET Remove Windows Security item from Start menu  Remove Disconnect option From Shut Down dialog  Set path for   5 Roaming Profiles  TS User Home Directory  Sets rules for remote control of Terminal Services user sessions  Start a program on connection    Not configure  Not configure  Not configure    Not configure  Not configure  Not configure  Not configure  Not configure  Not configure  Not configure  Not configure  Not configure  Not configure  Not configure    bak    gt                  Extended          Expand the tree to  Computer Configuration   Administrative Templates     Windows Components   Terminal Services   Set the parameter  Enforce  Removal of Remote Desktop Wallpaper  to  Disabled      Note  the use of a desktop background must also be allowed within the terminal  set up  See Chapter 5 1 6     AX3000   User s Manual 127    Installing under Windows AXEL    5 5 5   Allowing Blank Passwords with Windows 2003    By default  with a Windows 2003 server  it s impossible to set a blank password  for a remote user     To allow blank passwords run the  Local Security Policy  utility  in  Start     Program   Administrative Tools             Local Security Settings    Of x   Eile Action View                  i ES        Security Settings   Zi  Account Policies  5 09 Local Policies Disabled   m ca Audit Policy c Disabled   El ca 
47.  Name  port   these are the RDP ICA printer name s   This  allows the selection of only one printer to be redirected      Default printer  set  or not  a printer as the default printer      Redirected COM LPT Port  COM port s  are selected through a list  This  list is composed by the following items      All     None     Xxx  port   these are the COM port name s   This allows the  selection of only one COM port to be redirected      Redirected USB Drive  enable disable the mass storage device  redirection  The  Access Permission  value is set globally   See Chapter  3 2 4       Redirected Smartcards  enable disable the smartcard redirection      Auto Connection  when set to yes  the option allows the ICA session to  be automatically established when a smartcard is inserted in the reader      Redirected Sound  enable disable the audio redirection     d  Remapping a COM LPT port    Terminal COM ports must be remapped to server COM ports  The remapping  commands are  change client  or  net use   These commands may be issued  from a command prompt from the terminal s Citrix session     Example  the Windows          port is remapped to the terminal COM1 port  net use com4    client com1   or  change client com4  com1     Note  this remapped resource is only for the terminal  In this example COMA is  not seen by other users         How to set up a user account to automatically launch a  net use  command       Create a shareable directory called Netlogon     In this directory creat
48.  Network       Hot        21 bits 8 bits    ClssC   1  1 0  Network       Host      Thus every IP address occupies 4 bytes and contains both     A network address  and       host address     Note  all devices attached to the same network must have the same class and  the same network address  Each must have a different host address     252 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    For example  an AX3000 connected  over a network  to a host with an IP  address 192 1 168 40  class C  three bytes for the Network address  must have  the three first bytes of its address set to 192 1 168  The fourth byte cannot be  equal to 40     A 2 3   Router    Depending on the network topology  the AX3000 and the host may be installed  on different physical networks and linked through one or several routers     Two types of router can be used to access remote networks     A default router  this router knows how to reach many remote networks     Specific routers  in charge of one remote network     The default router is only identified by an IP address     The specific routers are identified by the following parameters     Router IP address  this router must be connected to the same network  as the AX3000     Destination IP Address  IP address of the host or the network to be  reached     Destination Type  two values     Host  the destination is a single host     Network  the destination is a whole local network  the class mask  is applied to this IP address      Notes     At the AX3000 level 
49.  Option  A 7   Setting the IP address by a ping command  A 8   Administration command list  A 9   Firmware downloading  A 10   Going further     A 11   Hardware and firmware information    AX3000   User s Manual 3    AXEL Introduction to the AX3000      oe  INTRODUCTION TO THE AX3000    AX3000   User s Manual 5    Introduction to the AX3000 AXEL    This chapter introduces the main features of the AXEL TCP IP terminal     1 1   TERMINAL MODELS    The manual describes the configuration and the use of all the Axel terminal  models  The following table lists the main differences between models                                                                             M75   M75E   M85 M80F M75D   M75C M70F   M70W   w75p   M65C   Connection  Ethernet  TCP IP    10 100   10 100   10 100   10 100   10 100   10 100   10 100   10 100   BaseT   BaseT   BaseT   BaseT   BaseT   BaseT   BaseT   BaseT  Wireless  802 11    option     option                      Serial  RS232  yes USB yes yes                                          Text Emulations yes yes yes yes yes     yes yes  RDP   ICA yes yes yes yes yes yes yes      Virtual Desktop yes yes                          VNC Client yes yes yes yes yes     yes      Nbr de colors 32bpp   32bpp   16bpp   16bpp   16bpp   16bpp   16bpp      Connectors  Parallel Port 1 USB 1 1         1 1  Serial port 2 USB 2 2 USB USB 2 2  USB Port 2 4 2 2 2 2          USB 2 yes yes                          Other  USB Driver yes yes Firmware Option MSC          S
50.  Remove  Add t                 192 168 1 166 root  External URL  E g   https  myServer myPort  EE     C v  Direct connection to desktop    9 Bee oy SEE This change will take effect on next login for each user      Terminal services sources     Details    Smart card authentication  Not allowed v   RSA SecurlD 2 Factor Authentication   Other sources  0 Details    View Servers ecurlD and Windows user name matching  Ben Disable Edit   gt   gent configuration file  sdconf rec    Name Activation Enabled Settings                               AX3000   User s Manual    121    Installing under Windows AXEL    With VIEW 4  disable the  Use secure tunnel connection to desktop  option     Edit View Connection Ser           General   Authentication                                 External URL  Example        Tags  Separate     Tags can be used to restrict which pools can H    Use secure tunnel connection to desktop     _  Use secure tunnel connection for Local Mode operations                  Use SSL for Local Mode operations           Use SSL when provisioning desktops in Local Mode       Use deduplication for Local Mode operations                 _  Use compression for Local Mode operations                   5 5   CONFIGURING THE WINDOWS SERVER  ICA RDP     Warning  it is assumed that the Terminal Server is fully licensed  and terminal  services are fully installed and enabled  Please consult the Microsoft  documentation for more information     The RDP or ICA server configuration is pe
51.  These parameters are      TCP Port  OS 400 telnet port  Generally 23      TERM Value  terminal capabilities  Default value is IBM 3477 FC      Auto Connection  if this parameter is set to  yes   the connection will be  automatically established when the AX3000 is powered  Otherwise  the  user can press  lt Alt gt  lt Fx gt  to establish the connection      Auto Reconnection  if this parameter is set to  yes   a new connection is  automatically established after a disconnection  Otherwise  the user can  press   Alt     Fx   to establish    new connection      Enhanced Parameters  see Appendix A 10 3      Transparent Mode  this mode allows ASCII data to be sent to printer  session port  The possible values are      No    Yes  data can be encoded in decimal and hexadecimal notations    Yes  hexa  data is encoded only in hexadecimal notation      On Off ASCII Sequence  start and stop transparent mode sequence  For   more information see Chapter 6 2 5     c  Using the Printer  The Prt5250 service is a client service  This means that each Prt5250 auxiliary  port opens a connection to the AS 400 when the AX3000 is powered on  From    the AS 400  a printer is available once the associated Prt5250 connection is  established     160 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 400    A printer handled through the Prt5250 service is seen as a standard spooled  OS 400 printer and is managed through standard system commands       gt  GO PRINTER    d  In Event of Problems    Nothing
52.  a telnet client     It is also possible     To build and manage a terminal database     To compile a list  batch  of commands to run consecutively     To download a firmware though BOOTP     To set IP addresses by using the device MAC address     Repair terminals that have lost their firmware  bootp error     For more information about the AxRM utility  read the manual  Axel Remote  Management   Administration Software for Axel Terminals and Office Servers      10 2   REMOTE CONTROL    This functionality allows an administrator to remotely take control of a terminal   The administrator can passively watch the users screen or actively take control  with his own keyboard for various support or administration purposes     The prerequisite of this function are      Only a text mode display is supported  This is the following session  types  telnet  5250  3270 and set up environment    AX3000   User s Manual 237    Remote Administration AXEL     The remote control function is enabled on the remote terminal  see  below      10 2 1   Configuring    To set up the remote control function  select the menu  Configuration     Terminal   Remote Control   For more information  please refer to Chapter  3 2 6     10 2 2   Operation    Use AxRM to take the control of the terminal  See Chapter 10 1     10 3   INTERACTIVE TELNET SET UP    The AX3000 interactive set up can be accessed through a telnet session  A  specific TCP port is used     The default value of this TCP port is 4096  This val
53.  audio redirection     5 1 6   Bandwidth    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Bandwidth  and press  lt Space gt   The  following box is displayed     Yes   No   Display and Aux Ports  All   High   High    Allow the following       These parameters are      Bitmap Cache  enabling the bitmap cache allows the AX3000 to store  images  icon  buttons  etc  locally  This can both improve the AX3000  performance and decrease network traffic      Offscreen Cache  enabling the offscreen cache allows the AX3000 to  store images in a  non visible    part of the VGA memory  This parameter  can be enabled for a single session  This can both improve the AX3000  performance and decrease network traffic     Compress  this allows Windows to send compressed data  This  optimizes bandwidth but in some cases can decrease overall  performance  The possible values are  no    display  or  display and aux   ports       Mouse Traffic  the options are      All  default   all mouse events  clicks and position  are sent to the  server     94 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows      Click  only the click events are sent to the server  This reduces the  data flow  But the mouse cursor is not updated in real time  This  mode can significantly reduce bandwidth      Mouse Sensitivity  This setting varies the sample rate of the mouse  If  the sensitivity is increased the mouse movement will be more fluid  but  also network activity is increased as the sample rate is increased      A
54.  be resolved     To resolve a name possibly more than one DNS request is needed  if one or  more default DNS domains are defined   The resolution process is stopped  either when the AX3000 receives a positive response from a DNS server   success  an IP address is associate to this name  or when all the DNS  requests has been sent and no positive response has been received  failure   the name is not resolved      The order of the requests sent to resolve a hostname is called the resolution  strategy     The resolution strategy depends on both     Whether or not a domain name is declared     Whether the name to resolve is complete     If no default DNS domain is defined in the AX3000 Set Up  the resolution is  done with the name itself regardless of whether the name is full or not     If one or more default DNS domains are defined  the resolution strategy  depends on the name     Full name  the resolution is first done with this name  If unsuccessful new  resolutions are performed by concatenating the full name with the defined  DNS domains     Incomplete Name  the resolutions are first done with the defined default  DNS domains  If unsuccessful a new resolution is performed with this  incomplete name     Example of name resolutions  looking at the host table in Chapter 3 1 3 the  name resolution attempts are      as400  this is not a full name  the resolution is first made with the first  DNS domain  as400 servers axel com   Then  in event of failure  with the  second DNS doma
55.  c  Disconnect by the AX3000    The  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Shift gt  lt D gt  keystroke  locally processed by the AX3000   allows the current session to be disconnected and works regardless the  protocol or emulation     As above  the session is disconnected  at the TCP IP level  but the current  environment  desktop and running applications  is not closed  The user will be  able to retrieve this environment the next time the connection is opened     5 6 4 Turning Off the AX3000    If the AX3000 is powered off without logging out problems may be encountered     The Windows Operating System cannot detect a TCP IP device being turned   off  so the current RDP or ICA connections remain active at the operating  system level     If the operating system doesn t provide an automatic procedure to allow  sessions to time out  these  phantom  connections will stay alive until the  operating system is rebooted     To avoid this scenario there are two possible methods     Using a time out to close idle session   See Chapter 5 4 3     Manually disconnecting the phantom session s    See Chapter 5 4 7     5 6 5   In Event of Connection Problems    Most problems occurring on initial connection time are related to licensing  problems  The possible errors are    1  No more TSE Cal is available  new CAL must be bought    2  The Axel terminal had been already connected to another TSE server  In this    case  the license token stored by the Axel terminal is not compliant with this  server  To
56.  char max    ethernet_dhcp_tracemode   yes   no   ethernet_dhcp_checkipaddr   yes   no    ethernet_ipaddr 192 168 1 241  IP address format    ethernet_netmask 255 255 255 0  IP address format   ethernet_axDNS default DNS dom  character string  64 char max    ethernet_updateDNS dhcp  no   dhcp   terminal   ethernet dns servIP  in address format   ethernet dns domain   character string  64 char max    ethernet dns FQDNexists   display error   abort   continue   ethernet dns tracemode no  yes   no    thernet router  ip   IP address format    thernet router  target   IP address format   default    thernet router  mask   IP address format   Note  when a configuration file is obtained from an AX3000  the   ethernet ipaddr  and  ethernet netmask  parameters are commented out   Router explanation      The  ethernet               ip  parameter is the router IP address  the     ethernet               target  parameter is the target host  or network  IP  address and the  ethernet               mask  parameter is an optional  network mask used to reach the target network      The default router is encoded by  ethernet router o ip  set to  0 0 0 0     ethernet router o target  set to  default  and  ethernet router o mask   set to  0 0 0 0      TCP IP Parameters    tcp axname axel203039  character string  64 char max      tcp comment string   character string  32 char max      268 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    tcp_host _name vangogh  tcp host  ip 192 168 1 252    character str
57.  device name of printer on AIX    b  Using Ipd under IBM AIX V4 x    Enter the SMIT fast path smit spooler then select  Add a Print Queue    and     Remote        Printers can be added using either of two methods      Standard Processing  AIX sends a raw file to the AX3000  Three  parameters are required     Name of Queue to Add  name of the printer accessed by the Ip  command    Destination Host for Remote Jobs  hostname of the AX3000   refer to  etc hosts    Name of Queue on Remote Printer  this is the    Printer Port  Name  associated with the AX3000 s port      Local Filter  AIX passes the file to the printer through a formatting filter   The first parameter required is the type of printer  Select this from the list  of supported printers  Three parameters are required      Name of Queue to Add  name of the printer accessed by the Ip  command     Destination Host for Remote Jobs  hostname of the AX3000   refer to  etc hosts      Name of Queue on Remote Printer  this is the  Printer Port  Name  associated with the AX3000 s port    Note  Use of the Local Filter method is strongly recommended     AX3000   User s Manual 215    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    c  Using        under SCO UNIX    Run scoadmin and select  Printer   Printer Manager   Then select  Printer     Add Remote      UNIX   A dialog box is displayed  Two parameters are  required      Host  hostname of the AX3000  refer to  etc hosts      Printer  this is the    Printer Port Name  associated with the AX300
58.  displays a dialog box which  lets certain connection parameters be changed  See Chapter 5 1 7      Auto Logon  press   Space   to set the  Automatic Logon  function  and or the  Auto Run  function  For more information  see Chapter 5 1 4     Display Parameters  press   Space   to set display settings  resolution   and colors   For more information  see Chapter 5 1 2      Additional Parameters  pressing   Space   displays a dialog box  which  lets certain RDP parameters be changed  For more information  see  Chapter 5 1 3      Redirected Resources  press   Space   to set redirected printers and  COM ports  For more information  see Chapter 5 1 5      Bandwidth  pressing   Space    displays a dialog box  which lets certain  parameters be changed  For more information  see Chapter 5 1 6     Note  after saving changes power cycle the AX3000     AX3000   User s Manual 85    Installing under Windows AXEL    5 1 2   Display Parameters    Within the  Session Profile    box  select  Display Parameters  and press   lt Space gt   The following box is displayed     Format    Default       This box allows display settings  resolution  number of colors and frequency  to  be set  The availability of these parameters depends of the Type value      Default  these three parameters are issued from general settings  see  Chapter 3 2 2   When general settings are modified  these three  parameters are automatically updated with new values      Customized  the three parameters are independent from
59.  flow will prevent the router from hanging up  In this scenario the keepalive    AX3000   User s Manual 305    Appendix AXEL    can cause expensive phone bills     h  The  Break Code  Parameter    For the telnet session  the  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Pause gt  hotkey sends a  break  code to  the host  This break code is defined by the RFC 854  this is      BREAK        If needed  this break code value can be modified  The extra values are     AO  Abort Output      IP  Interrupt process      None   lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Pause gt  generates no code     i  The  Enabling NAWS  Parameter    The NAWS function  Negotiate About Window Size   RFC 1073  is an optional  feature negotiated when the telnet session established  It allows the terminal  screen format  line x row  to be indicated to the server  when the session is  established or at any time when the screen format is modified      This parameter allows this function to be disabled  some telnet servers don t  correctly support the NAWS function    i  The  Always add NULL after CR  Parameter   This option allows to be compliant with different telnet server implementation   about ASCII mode     j  The  National Language Negotiation  Parameter   This option is only available with 5250 emulation  It allows some environment    variables  KBDTYPE  CODEPAGE and CHARSET  to be set     A 10 4   RDP ICA Sessions  Microsoft Keyboard Codes    For RDP ICA sessions a Microsoft keyboard code can be specified  This code  allows a keyboar
60.  general  settings    Note  the 32bpp value color allows the true color mode on Windows  2008  24bpp is not supported by this O S       5 1 3   RDP Additional Parameters    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Additional Parameters  and press   lt Space gt   The following box is displayed                 Connection  Medium Level        12      7     No   Keyboard and Mouse  Remote  Enabled       86 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    These parameters are     Encryption  three values of encryption are available   For more  information see Chapter 5 5 1       No  only non encrypted connections are accepted      Low Level  only one direction encrypted connections are accepted    Data sent by Windows is encrypted      Medium Level  both direction        one direction encrypted  connections are accepted     High Level  only both direction encrypted connections are  accepted      Connection Name  this character string identifies the AX3000 within the  Windows Operating System  By default this name is the terminal name   see Chapter 3 1 1     Note  This is not the identifier used by Windows for licensing control  The  licensing identifier cannot be changed      Console Mode  when set to  yes   the RDP connection will take remote  control of the Windows Server main console       lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Del gt   the two modes for this keystroke are      Local  the keystroke is handled by the AX3000 and is used for  shutdown the terminal  see Chapter 4 5  
61.  init high   low    usb  dtr init high   low     usb  service name Usb  character string  8 char max      usb  associate host vangogh character string  64 char max      usb  associate term ansi character string  8 char max   g                                          usb  associate autoconn yes  yes   no   usb  associate reconn yes  yes   no   usb  service tcpport 2050  number   usb  rtty accept no  yes   no   usb  filter nl no  yes   no   usb  preprint string   character string  48 char max    usb  postprint string   character string  48 char max    usb  associate devname   character string  10 char max    usb  associate msgqname   character string  10 char max    usb  associate msgqlib   character string  10 char max    usb  associate font 11  character string  10 char max    usb  associate mfrtypmdl   character string  10 char max    usb  associate pprsrcl   character string  10 char max    usb  associate pprsrc2   character string  10 char max    usb  associate envelope   character string  10 char max    usb  associate ascii899 no  yes   no     272 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    usb _associate_wscstname   usb  associate wscstlib   usb  associate transp   usb  associate transp seq   usb  tcp window 1024   usb  tcp mss 512  usb  tcp ttl 64   usb  tcp setport random  usb  tcp nagle disable  usb  tcp keepalive no       usb  tcp keepaliveval 120    d  TCP Logical Ports    character string   character string   yes   yes hexa    character string     number     number
62.  is printed  this is a quick test to check the hardware  AX3000  parallel serial port  cable and printer      In the AX3000 Set Up  select  Configuration   Ports   xxx   Within the  displayed box  select the  TEST  button     A test banner should be printed     If not there is a basic hardware problem that needs to be fixed  Check cable   check cable is attached to correct port in back of AX3000 etc     When the AX3000 printer is not  seen  by the OS 400 spooler the following  problems can be suspected     To establish why a Prt5250 session has been refused  enter the AX3000 Set   Up and select the menu  Diagnostics   Connections      Within the displayed dialog box  select the REFRESH button and press   CR     Read the information displayed for the printer port  AUX1  AUX2 or PARA      Note  if no information is displayed  double check that the auxiliary port is  associated with the right AS 400 host     When the connection status continually cycles through CLOSED to CONNECT  and there is no error number displayed at the end of the line  the device name is  already used by another connection     If the Prt5250 connection status is  closed  in the displayed box  an error  number is displayed at the end of the line     The main error codes are     8903  Device not valid for session   the printer name is used for another  connection     8925  Creation of device failed   during the printer creation operation  at  least one parameter is detected wrong  ex   non existing printer m
63.  lt SetUp gt   lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Esc gt   Disconnecting the session  lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt D gt    Ctrl     Alt     Shift     D    Sending data to aux  port   Alt right     F2     Alt Gr     F2         6 2 3   Programming Function Keys  Macro Feature     The Axel 5250 emulation allows function keys to be programmed  For example  a series of keystrokes can be recorded and played back by pressing a single  key     The recorded data is stored in non volatile memory so is not affected by  switching off     Recorded keystrokes can be assigned to any of the 24 function keys   lt F1 gt  to   lt F12 gt  or  lt Shift gt  lt F1 gt  to  lt Shift gt  lt F12 gt       a  Programming a Function Key    To record a series of keystrokes proceed as follows     Press  lt Alt Gr gt  lt F4 gt  to set the record mode     Press any of the 24 function keys to which you want to assign     Type the key sequence you want to save     Press   Alt Gr gt  lt F4 gt  to exit the record mode     Notes     Memory usage  256 recordable keystrokes per function key     To delete a recorded function key  you have to record an empty key  sequence     AX3000   User s Manual 153    Installing under OS 400 AXEL    Example     1  Press   Alt Gr gt  lt F4 gt  to set the Record mode  The 5250 status line is  set in reverse video mode and the following information is displayed     Maximum recordable keystrokes for the terminal    The 24 boxes are the 24 function keys  a solid box means that data    is recorded 
64.  most common storage devices  Mass storage devices must be setup at two levels     General  see Chapter 3 2 4    Per Session  see Chapters 5 1 5 and 5 2 6    Note  The status line  see Chapter 3 6 2  gives an indicator showing when the  device is being accessed    It s strictly forbidden to remove a device currently in use as the file system  could be damaged and the integrity of the storage device lost     56 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    3 4 10   Connecting a Smartcard Reader    Note  only available with the SCA firmware option     This function is designed for PC SC compliant smartcard readers  Two readers  are supported by the Axel terminal      CCID readers      Aladdin eToken     Note  Some  non PC SC  readers are also supported  This is achieved with the  RDP ICA COM port redirection  or by the tty protocol for Unix Linux   In this  case RS232 devices or USB RS232 devices must be used  see Chapter 3 4 7      For the PC SC devices  a  reader store  is maintained by the terminal  This  store is accessed by the  Configuration   Advanced   Smartcard Readers   menu      lt Space gt    lt Space gt      lt Space gt        A reader is automatically added to the store when being connected for the first  time  Up to four readers can be stored  To consult or change reader  characteristics select the entry and press  lt Space gt   A dialog box as shown is  displayed     0529 0600  AKS  ifdh    Persistent       AX3000   User s Manual 57    Interactive Set Up 
65.  network type     sa  IP address of tftp host     gw  optional router     ha  Ethernet address of the AX3000    ip  IP address of the AX3000  this address is only used during the  downloading operation      bf  full firmware file name  path included     294 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    Examples of bootp configuration files     a  When the AX3000 and the tftp host are on the same network    net hn df  etc btdump ht ethernet  sa 192 168 1 252 to auto        axell tc net  ht ethernet  ha 00A034000001 ip 192 168 1 242 bf  tmp axel     b  When the AX3000 accesses the tftp host via a router       net  hn df  etc btdump ht ethernet  sa 192 1 1 243 to auto   netl tc net sm 255 255 255 000  gw 192 168 1 252   axell tc netl ht ethernet  vm rfc1048 ha 00A034000001 ip 192 168 1 242 bf    usr axel firm9645              IMPORTANT  if a problem occurred during a previous download operation   whatever method was used   the firmware of the target AX3000 may have  been erased  To restore valid firmware  the bootp tftp protocol will  automatically be run when this target AX3000 is switched on     a  Remote Administration   The remote administration command depends on the operating system  Refer  to the Chapter 5 5  Unix Linux   the Chapter 6 4  OS 400  or the Chapter 7 3   OS 390      Example for Unix Linux       rsh ax3001 ax download password    The message  Download in progress     will be displayed on the operator s  console if downloading can be performed  AX3000 and tftp hos
66.  on the bottom of the screen   This status line allows       The current session to be easily identified     The other connected session s  to be easily seen     AX3000   User s Manual 69    Interactive Set Up AXEL      Switching sessions by clicking the label with the mouse     A label  11 character string  is associated with each session  This label is by  default the name of the connected server but it can be user defined to any  value  The label of the current session is displayed in reverse video mode  A  session label is preceded by an indicator  circle       The circle is empty  the session is declared but not connected      The circle is filled in green  the session is connected    Note  when a mass storage device is currently in use  a colored indicator is  displayed on the right  green  read in progress  red  write in progress   It s  strictly forbidden to remove a USB device when currently in use     3 6 3   Multi Session Keystroke    The keystrokes to move from one session to another can be customized  A  session keystroke is composed by     An introducer  this combination is selected through a list     Shift   Ctrl   Alt Shift  Ctrl Shift  Ctrl aAlt  Ctrl Alt Shift      A session key  this key must different session per session     70 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    3 7   OTHER FUNCTIONS    Less used functions are available through the  Configuration   Advanced     menu   Configuration Diagnostics Download  Network  Terminal  Sessions  Tuning
67.  printing with the rsh command  or rcmd  command  according to the operating system used      To set the          service on the required auxiliary port  select the remd service  from the  Configuration   Ports   xxx   yyy  dialog box  Then enter the name  of the associated printer port    For more information about the rsh command  refer to Chapter 5 3 3    c  Using printd Legacy Service   The printd service is a legacy printer service used in conjunction with the UNIX    axconf utility  It is supported to maintain backward compatibility  but Ipd or tty  services should always be used in preference     3 6   TERMINAL LOCAL DESKTOP    The terminal local desktop configuration provides     The session manager settings     The status line settings     Hot keys to flip between sessions     68 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    Select the  Configuration   Sessions   Local Desktop  menu     Session Manager    Desktop  Medium Blue  Status Line    Keys for Switching Sessions       3 6 1   Session Manager    When no session is connected a specific screen is displayed  This is the     session manager     Two styles are available for this session manager     Classic  legacy text mode     Desktop  user friendly display with icons and status line     Selecting a background color allows the  Desktop  session manager to be  customized     The use of the session manager is described in Chapter 4 1    3 6 2   Status Line   An optional status line can be enabled  It s located
68.  reset the Axel  License Store   enter the AX3000 Set Up  select    132 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows     Configuration   Advanced   License Store   The displayed dialog box allows  you to delete the current license token s      3  The Windows server doesn t convert a temporary license to a  standard   license  The server must be updated     For Windows 2003  install Service Pack 1     For Windows 2000  please consult  http   support microsoft com default aspx scid kb en us 827355    5 7   MANAGING PRINTERS    Auxiliary ports  2 serial and 1 parallel   USB logical ports and network printers  are provided by the AX3000  These ports are independently controlled so  multiple printers can be attached to the AX3000     The AX3000 offers an embedded LPD protocol  This protocol is available in  most operating systems and allows one or more printers connected to the  AX3000 to be accessed as network printers   l e  these printers are controlled  through the spooler and are available for all authorized users      Note  Windows 2000 and 2003 support RDP printer redirection  The same  printer can be handled with both LPD and RDP redirection protocols     The main characteristics of these protocols are     LPD Protocol   Server level printer     The printer must be added to the Windows spooler by the administrator     The printer name is static    The printer is available when the terminal is powered on and can be  accessed by any user     The printer dataflow i
69.  resources mechanism allows one or more local resources to be     published    to the Windows server  These resources are available only for the  terminal s user  They are created on the Windows server when the connection  is established and removed when the session is disconnected     The following local resources are supported      Printers  before being redirected each printer must be declared at the     physical connection port  level  See first sub section a  then c       COM LPT ports before being redirected each port must be declared at  the physical port level  See first sub section b  then c  and d       Mass storage devices  see sub section c       Smartcard readers  see sub section c      Audio  see sub section c     a  Declaring a Redirected Printer    At the RDP ICA connection time a redirected printer will be automatically added  to the Windows spooler  It will be removed when the session disconnects     Before being redirected an RDP ICA printer must be declared at the  physical    connection port  level  The available ports are  auxiliary ports  parallel  Aux1  and Aux2   USB logical ports and network printers     102 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    Select the dialog box of the  Connection port   menu  Configuration   Ports               For example  the Aux1 port       Line Parameters    Printer  9600  871 No    Associated Service       RDP ICA Redirection                Set the  Active  parameter to  As Printer    or  As Printer an
70.  s2 display  format     s2 display  geometry   s2 display depth        s3 alternate geometry   s  associate realport  s  associate to   s  associate toval       s  associate sshusername   s  associate sshenpassword     278     rdp   ica   vne   5250   3270    Citrix Xen Desktop   VMWARE VDM    ansi   ansi dos   unix sco 3 2 2       unix sco 3 2 4   sco openserver   xenix sco   unix svr4   ansi mos  ansi interactive   ansi rs 6000   ansi data general   vt220   vt52  c332   sm9400   sm9412   ato300   hft    telnet   tty   ssh   serial                   auxl   aux2   usb      auxl   aux2   usb      character string  64 char max     character string  64 char max     character string  10 char max     character string  20 char max     yes   no     yes   no     character string  10 char max     number     default   customized      full screen   resolution format        8bpp   15 bpp   16bpp   24bpp   default   800x600    number    yes   no    number     character string  60 char max                            character string  30 char max      AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    s _associate_sshpassword   s _associate_sshcmd    s  associate script    s  associate username   ds  associate enpassword   ds  associate password   s  associate progname    s  associate menuname        s  associate libname   s  tcp window 1024   s  tcp mss 512   S  tcp ttl 64   s  tcp setport random    o    s _tcp_nagle disable  s  tcp keepalive no  s  tcp keepaliveval 120    s  telnet break        s
71.  sessions  and terminal setup menus      Custom  for nationalities not listed a custom keyboard nationality can  be entered   Microsoft Keyboard Code parameter      Microsoft Keyboard Code  enter the required keyboard code value  See  Appendix A 10 4 for valid values     CAPS Key Mode  select  Shift Lock  or  Caps Lock      3 2 5   Time Settings    The time management is used for     Displaying date and time within the local status bar     Updating modification creation file time  memory stick support     Automatic terminal reboot    42 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    Select the  Configuration   Terminal   Time settings  menu  The following  dialog box is displayed     Internal Clock    Time Zone   01 00  Paris  Yes     lt Space gt     Automatic Reboot  Never       a  Internal Clock    Unlike a PC  there is no local clock  with battery  in Axel terminals  To provide a  local clock we have introduced support for a time client  NTP protocol   This  allows the time to be obtained when the terminal is powered on     Enter the time server IP address  or the DNS name   This information can be  automatically obtained via the DHCP protocol   See Chapter 3 1 2      The date and time can be displayed within the terminal status bar  The following  option allows the display formats to be selected     Date Format   JJ MM AA  or  MM JJ AA     Time Format    HH MM  or  hh MM    For the second format the time is  displayed  modulo 12  with PM or AM after      b  Time Red
72.  standard  of cont c as this is already used for  another function within Unix Linux    b  Paste    To Windows Session  RDP or ICA      Use the standard  Paste  function  For example   Ctrl     V      To a VNC Session   The  vncconfig  tool must be run  Select  Paste  in the contextual menu of the  Linux software     To a Text Session  5250  3270  ANSI  VT  WYSE       Press  lt Ctrl gt  lt V gt   with 5250 and 3270 emulations  or  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt V gt   with    other emulations  to paste the contents of the local clipboard   Note  for the 5250 and 3270 sessions  a   Field Exit   function is sent at the end  of each line contained in the clipboard     80 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Using the AX3000    4 5   TURNING OFF THE AX3000    A careful check should be made before turning off the TCP IP AX3000 if TCP IP  connections are active  The operating system cannot detect if a TCP IP device  is turned off  so the current TCP IP connections remain active as far as the  server is concerned   resulting in various potential issues     Under Unix it is advisable not to turn off the TCP IP AX3000 when a login  prompt is displayed  something which is commonly done with serial UNIX  terminals   This is because a telnet connection has been opened and will then  become an orphan process  The following examples illustrate how the TCP IP  AX3000 differs from a conventional dumb terminal      If the  auto reconnect  parameter if set to  yes   a stable stage cannot be  reached on t
73.  states are     selecting  searching a DHCP server  broadcast     requesting  requesting an IP address from the DHCP server  which answered    selecting       bound  search has been successfully completed  IP address has  been set     free  DHCP protocol is not enabled or DHCP protocol failed    renewing  renewing the leased IP address to the DHCP server  which answered    selecting       rebinding  renewing the leased IP address to any DHCP server   broadcast     DHCP Server  IP address of the DHCP server     Lease Time  seconds   amount of time of the leased IP address  For  BOOTP protocol  the value is    infinity        Remaining Lease  remaining time before lease expires  For BOOTP  protocol  the value is  infinity      AX3000   User s Manual 231    Tools and Statistics AXEL      Update Type  information about the DNS server update when updated  by the terminal  Main values are     None  no update    Direct   Reverse  both types are done by the terminal     Direct   Reverse  by DHCP   direct update done by the terminal  and reverse update done by the DHCP server    Status  the possible update values are     None  no update  not requested     Done  update succeeded    Failed  update failed    Pending  update in progress    Dhcp  update done by the DHCP server  the terminal had been  informed to forgive the update     9 3 3   Statistic    The statistics box is the following     Correct Frames    Errors  Input    Output    REFRESH       Correct Frames   Output  and  Input  
74.  the number of colors   This information  box gives the values actually used              Server IP Address a b c d  Server Version RDP 5  License License Token Transmitted  Connection Name axel0B1111  Encryption Medium level  128 bits   Number of colors 65536  16bpp   Resolution 1280x1024 60 Hz  Compression Required Screen  Screen yes  64 Ko  Printer and Aux  no  Redirected Printer not required  Redirected COM Port not required  Redirected USB drive not required  Redirected smartcard not required  Redirected audio negotiate  PCM   Received format PCM 16bits  stereo  22KhZ  Press any key       5 6 3   Closing a Windows Session    When a session is closed  the AX3000 either reconnects to the same session   displays the  idle screen   or reverts to the first active session     Three cases of disconnection can be distinguished    a  Log Off from the Desktop   From the  Start  menu  select  Shut Down   Within the list  select  Log off xxx    Windows ends active applications  closes the desktop and disconnects the  session  at the TCP IP level      b  Disconnect from the Desktop    From the  Start  menu  select  Shut Down     Within the list  select  Disconnect    The Windows Operating System disconnects this session  at the TCP IP level      AX3000   User s Manual 131    Installing under Windows AXEL    But in this case  the current environment  desktop and applications  is  maintained  The user will be able to retrieve this environment the next time the  connection is opened    
75.  the routing algorithm uses a specific router to reach  the destination  If no specific router fits  the default router is used    The AX3000 doesn t support ICMP REDIRECT requests  dynamic  routers are not supported      AX3000   User s Manual 253    Appendix AXEL    Example 1  router 1 is used to reach the 192 168 2 xxx network and router 2 is  used to reach the 192 1 1 xxx network     192 168 2         gt     192 168 1 12       Router 1       192 168 1 11    192 168 1 10    The AX3000 route table will show the following     Other Routers    Gateway IP addr Target IP addr Target Type Netmask  192 168 2 0 Network        7157  192 168 1 12 Network 255 255 255 0    DELETE CANCEL       254 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    Example 2  router 1 is used to reach both networks  192 168 2 xxx and  192 1 1             192 168 2               Router 1    192 168 1 11    192 168 1 10    The AX3000 route table is     Routers     lt Space gt        A 3   THE DHCP PROTOCOL    DHCP  Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  is an industry standard protocol  that lets a DHCP server  Unix  Windows  AS 400  etc   allocate temporary IP  addresses and other network parameters to terminals and PCs when they are  powered on  This can greatly simplify managing large networks     AX3000   User s Manual 255    Appendix AXEL    A 3 1   Overview    Here is a brief description of Axel   s implementation DHCP      At boot time the AX3000 broadcasts DHCP requests to find the DHCP  server     If a DHC
76.  to be displayed     For example        Server IP Address 192 168 1 180  Emulation IBM5250  Resolution 1280x1024 60hz  Screen Size 80x24  Character Size 10x22    Press any key    AX3000   User s Manual 311    Appendix AXEL    A 11   HARDWARE AND FIRMWARE INFORMATION    To obtain the terminals firmware and hardware revisions  use one of the  following   1  Use the AxRM utility    Get Terminal Information  command   2  Enter the AX3000 interactive set up  and select       3  Get the AX3000 set up by issuing the setup_get remote command  the  revision is included in the text file banner    Example  rsh axname setup_get  gt  file  4  Use the following ax_version remote command to get the revision  directly   Example  rsh axname ax_version    A 11 1   Hardware Information    The AX3000 hardware information is FKx BVyyy     FKx is the circuit board code  FK stands for Flash Key     BVyyy is the boot code version  the boot code is the non erasable part of  the flash memory     There are currently five different generations of hardware in the field     FK3  former production hardware of models 55  55E and 56    FK5  former production hardware of models 55  55E and 56    FK11  former production hardware of models 55  55E and 56    FK7  former production hardware of models 65    FK13  former production hardware of models 65 and 65E    FK14  former production hardware of models 65 65E  PS 2 mouse     FK15  current production hardware of models 60 60E    FK16  former production hardware 
77. 0 char max    parallel associate envelope   character string  10 char max     parallel associate ascii899 no  yes   no    parallel  associate wscstname   character string  8 char max     parallel associate wscstlib   character string  8 char max     parallel associate transp   yes   yes hexa    parallel associate transp seq   character string  4 char max     parallel tcp window 1024  number    parallel tcp mss 512  number    parallel tcp ttl 264  number    parallel tcp setport random  ramdom   fixed    parallel tcp nagle disable  disable   enable    parallel tcp keepalive no  yes   no    parallel tcp keepaliveval 120  number    parallel  operating mode   optimised  standard    parallel sup signals   none   select   paper   both              AX3000   User s Manual    271    Appendix AXEL    c  USB Logical Ports    In the following section of the file  for ease of reading the USB logical port  number  1 to 4  has been represented by the     character  In a real  configuration file  the parameters for each port would  of course  be listed                       usb _service none  none   rtty   printd   lpd   rcmd  rtelnet   Prt5250   Prt3270  tty    usb _use bi directional  printer   bi directional    usb _speed 38400  300   600   1200   2400   4800  9600   19200   38400   57600  115200    usb  data  7 1 non   7 1 odd   7 1 even  8 1 non   8 l odd   8 1 even  d 2 non   7 2 odd   7 2 even  8 2 none   8 2 odd   8 2 even    Usb  flow ctrl rts cts none   rts cts   dtr dsr    usb  rts
78. 0 s port    Note  an AX3000 filter may be needed   8 3 3   The rsh Command  The rsh command  or          on SCO OpenServer  can be used to print a file   The rsh parameters are     The hostname or the IP address of the device     A keyword which is the AX3000 auxiliary port name  This name has been    set through the AX3000 Set Up  see Chapter 3 5 6      To print a file  the rsh command reads data from    standard input     stdin  and  sends this data to one of the AX3000 s auxiliary ports  For example       rsh axname parallel  lt  file   CR      In this example  axname is the name of the AX3000  refer to  etc hosts file   and parallelis the Printer Port Name of the AX3000 auxiliary port     8 3 4   Using Transparent Mode    One of the auxiliary or logical ports should be selected as the default printer  port which will be controlled by escape sequences     Select the  Configuration   Terminal   Miscellaneous  dialog and set the     default printer port        This default port can only be used if no network service          tty  etc  is currently  using it     216 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    Note  the default printer port is also used to perform local printing of the screen  using the   Prt Scr gt  key     8 4   THE AXEL TTY SERVER  8 4 1   Overview    The TTY server emulates a multi i o board connection over a TCP IP  connection  For example using this service a remote printer attached to an Axel  terminal is accessed by Unix as a local pr
79. 0424  Chinese   Singapore 1004 Slovak 041B  Chinese   Taiwan 0404 Sorbian 042E  Croatian 041A Spanish   Spain OCOA  Czech 0405 Spanish   Argentina 2C0A  Danish 0406 Spanish   Bolivia 400A  Dutch   Netherlands 0413 Spanish   Chile 340A  Dutch   Belgium 0813 Spanish   Colombia 240A  English   Australia 0C09 Spanish   Costa Rica 140A  English   Belize 2809 Spanish   Dominican Republic   1COA  English   Canada 1009 Spanish   Ecuador 300A  English   Caribbean 2409 Spanish   Guatemala 100A  AX3000   User s Manual 307       Appendix AXEL                                                                                                          English   Ireland 1809 Spanish   Honduras 480A  English   Jamaica 2009 Spanish   Mexico 080A  English   New Zealand 1409 Spanish   Nicaragua 4C0A  English   Philippines 3409 Spanish   Panama 180A  English   South Africa 1  09 Spanish   Peru 280A  English   Trinidad 2C09 Spanish   Puerto Rico 500A  English   United Kingdom 0809 Spanish   Paraguay 3C0A  English   United States 0409 Spanish   El Salvador 440A  Estonian 0425 Spanish   Uruguay 380A  Farsi 0429 Spanish   Venezuela 200A  Finnish 040B Southern Sotho 0430   Faroese 0438 Swahili 0441   French   France 040C Swedish   Sweden 041D  French   Belgium 080C Swedish   Finland 081D  French   Canada 0COC Tamil 0449  French   Luxembourg 140C Tatar 0444  French   Switzerland 100C Thai 041E  Gaelic   Ireland 083C Turkish 041F  Gaelic   Scotland 043C Tsonga 0431   German   Germany 0407 Ukrainian 0422  G
80. 1  dev ptyp12  dev ttyp12    aux2  dev ptyp13  dev ttyp13  parallel   dev ptyp2  dev ttyp2       An auxiliary port controlled by the tty server is seen as a Unix Linux local port   like a multi I O board      Data can be sent to an auxiliary port by     Either a redirection to the ttyp  example   cat file  gt   dev ttyp12      Or declaring a local printer attached to the ttyp   dev ttyp12   This printer  is used through the 1   command     8 3 2   The LPD Protocol  Set the auxiliary port as shown in Chapter 3 5 2     Use the appropriate UNIX system management tool to add a remote printer  At  least  two parameters are requested     The name of the remote host  enter the AX3000 s hostname  refer to  letc hosts      The name of the printer  this is the Printer Port Name entered when the  AX3000 was set up     Run the 1   command to use this printer   Note  some options of the Ip command  number of copies  banner  etc  cannot    be used  because the AX3000 is not a UNIX server and has no hard disk on  which to run a spooler     214 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    a  Using Ipd under IBM AIX V3 x    Enter the SMIT fast path smit mkrque  Four parameters are required     Name of Queue to Add       name of the printer accessed by the Ip command    Destination Host for Remote Jobs     hostname of the AX3000  refer to  etc hosts     Name of Queue on Remote Printer    gt   Printer Port Name  associated with the AX3000 s port    Name of Device to Add     gt 
81. 2    3 2 6   Terminal Remote Control                   ssec         45    3 2 7   PaSSWOrd           reti Ei E eo ERR ere 46  3 2 8   Miscellaneous    uc edi edm d 47  3 3   SETTING EACH SESSION               seen 48  3 3 1    TSE  rdp   or  Citrix  Ica     Virtual Desktop  Session Types          49  3 3 2    VNC  Session                                                      49  8 3 3    5250  SESSION  Type    ii un ia eredi ned 49  3 3 4    3270  Session                                               seien iiaii 50  3 3 5    Text Emulation  Session                                50  3 3 6    None  Session                                                   50  3 3 7   Duplicating Session Settings                         sess 50  3 42 08 5                                                                     nennen 50  9 41 Specifications    i ide             peti ed ee        50  3 4 2   Connecting a USB Keyboard                     sse 51  3 4 3   Connecting a USB Barcode                                                              52  3 4 4   Connecting a                                    52  3 4 5   Connecting a HUB                  sss seen enne 52  3 4 6   Connecting a Printer                  esses einen 52  3 4 7   Connecting a USB RS232                                                                   54  3 4 8   Connecting a Touch Screen                   sss 55  3 4 9   Connecting a Mass Storage                                                               55  3 4 10   
82. 2 2   Using a PC AT Keyboard  102 105                                                177  7 2 8   Programming Function Keys  Macro Feature                                178  123 3270 PRINTER  ane hh eee att eR eus 180  7 4  REMOTE ADMINISTRATION        enne 182  7 4 1   Remole Control 5    i hedge deren 182  7 4 2   Other Functions    oed eig e t cene d Done ue 182   8   INSTALLING UNDER UNIX LINUX                                 183  8 1  TEXT MODE SESSION  TCP IP OR SERIAL MODE                            184  8 1 1   Setting a Session Profile                        sss 184  8 1 2   Protocols  telnet  tty  ssh  ssh2 or       1       2                                 185  8 1 3   Selecting the Emulation                        sene 188  8 1 4   Display                                                        189  8 1 5   Customizing the Emulation                      esses 189  8 1 6   Coloring                                                             196  8 1 7   Underline Attribute Management                       sese 199  8 1 8   Connection Properties                   sse 200  6 1 9   LOGIN SCripli   sedo toe En idee eed De cet 201  8 1 10   The Multi Shell                          202  8 2   GRAPHICAL MODE SESSION  VNC                                                    205  8 2 1   Setting Up a VNC Session                  sse 205  8 2 2   Configuring VNC on the Unix Linux                                                   210  8 3  CONTROLLING PRINTERS                  
83. 3000   User s Manual    AXEL Tools and Statistics    9 2 1   Global Connection List     Select the  Diagnostics   Connections  dialog to check the status of all  defined connections     Connections    Host IP Addr  Port Miscellaneous    AUXILIARY PORTS  Port Service State Other Information    REFRESH CLOSE CONNECTIONS       Note     outside    the set up  use  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt X gt  displays this box     For each session  the following information is displayed     No  session number     Type  main values are TSE  ica  telnet  tty  vnc       State  the possible values are     Established  the session is connected     Closed  the session has ended     Syn sent  connection request in progress     Time Wait  connection close in progress     Server and IP Addr Host  the associated host     Port  the TCP port used for the session  this is usually 23 for telnet  2048  for tty and 59xx for vnc      Configuration  the associated pre defined configuration     AX3000   User s Manual 227    Tools and Statistics AXEL    For each auxiliary port  the following information is displayed     Port  the name of the         Aux1  Aux2  PARA  parallel   Usb1       Usb4   Net1 and Net2     Service and Other  information about the associated network service             printer port name and optional filter    rcmd  printer port name     telnet  associated host  TCP port  TERM and connection flags     tty  associated host  TCP port and connection flag     prt5250  associated host  TCP port  
84. 3000   User s Manual 63    Interactive Set Up AXEL    The embedded LPD print server allows the remote printer to be accessed as a  standard system printer     An LPD printer requires three parameters     The AX3000 s IP address or FQDN name if DHCP DNS is used     An identifier for the auxiliary port  user selectable character string      An optional filter to pre process the file before printing  but generally this  processing is done by the operating system level      To set the LPD service on a port  select the  Configuration   Ports   xxx     yyy  dialog and enter the following parameters      Service  select             Parameters  press   Space   to access the following dialog box     No    Space           Printer Port Name  this is the port identifier  Sometimes the same  name is used for the printer at the operating system level      NL CR NL Filter  The line feed character          can be mapped to  carriage return   line feed OxOD Ox0A      Enhanced parameters  see Appendix A 10 3      Pre print String  character string sent before the print job      Post print String  character string sent after the print job  for example    0    is a form feed     Note 1  If  Choose Portrait Landscape  is enabled  see Appendix A 10 2   the  parameter  Pre print String  is replaced by the two parameters  Portrait Pre   print String  and  Landscape Pre print String     Note 2  if a serial port is used for printing  set the operating mode to  Printer      For more information about I
85. 7   Closing Phantom Sessions    When the AX3000 is turned off without logging out  the current TCP IP  connection remains active on the server side  see Chapter 5 6 3      To close such sessions  use the  Terminal Services Manager  utility  on the   Administrative Tools  folder      AX3000   User s Manual 129    Installing under Windows AXEL    When this utility is run  a dialog box as shown below is displayed        ELAPTOP2   Terminal Services Manager    Actions View Tools Help    alao eal Z  x     All Listed Servers Processes   a    5 8 1          2       RDP Tcp  listener     Console  administrateur  CSISS exe  ER DP Tcp oe  tdpclip exe                    idle  internat exe  mspaint exe  tsadmin exe             For Help  press F1       On the left panel  select the session to be killed  then right click  Within the  displayed menu  select  Disconnect  command  After confirmation  the selected  session will be closed and removed from the session list     5 6   USING THE AX3000    5 6 1   Opening a Windows Session    On successful connection  the AX3000 displays the graphical login screen or  the desktop if the automatic logon function is set     5 6 2   Information about a Windows Session    Use  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Shift gt  lt I gt  to get information about the active Windows    130 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    session     When the session is established  the value of certain parameters can be re   negotiated by the server  for example
86. 92 168 1 2 192 168 1 1    To download an AX3000 firmware through BOOTP and TFTP       rsh axname ax download password    Where     axname   AX3000 name   etc hosts  or IP address     ax download   command for firmware downloading     password   specify the set up password if set        axfirm axel   path and name of the firmware file     192 168 1 2   TFTP Server IP address     192 168 1 1   optional router IP address     AX3000   User s Manual 223    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    Messages are displayed on the target AX3000  See Chapter 11 4    f  Viewing AX3000 Statistics    Some AX3000 statistics can be obtained by invoking the following command       rsh axname ax_getstat    Where    axname   AX3000 name   etc hosts  or IP address    ax_getstat   command for getting statistics     224 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Tools and Statistics    s   TOOLS AND STATISTICS    AX3000   User s Manual 225    Tools and Statistics AXEL    This chapter describes the embedded AX3000 tools     The AX3000 interactive set up provides the following administration features     Ping command    Connection management    Interface information    USB device list    9 1   THE PING COMMAND    The ping command is used to check for the presence of a live TPC IP device   Select the  Diagnostics   Ping  dialog from the AX3000 set up  then enter the  IP address or the name of the TCP IP peripheral     9 2   CONNECTION MANAGEMENT    Connection failures are often caused by incorrect settings     226 AX
87. AXEL    Smartcard reader parameters are     Reader ID  this value can t be modified  It s composed by the   Manufacturer ID  and  Product ID      Vendor Name  character string sent back by the terminal when a  SCardGetAttrib  option SCARD_ATTR_VENDOR_NAME  command is  issued by a Windows PC SC application     IFD Type  character string sent back by the terminal when a  SCardGetAttrib  option SCARD ATTR VENDOR IDF TYPE  command  is issued by a Windows PC SC application      Smartcard Reader Registration  generally a reader must be attached to  the terminal to be enumerated by a  PC SC application   SCardListReaders command   Some readers have to be listed even  when they are not attached  for example a token   reader and smartcard  are integrated in a memory stick   This parameter allows the method to  be selected  dynamic or persistent     The  DELETE  allows this store entry to be deleted     The use of a smartcard reader is enabled disabled per session  See Chapters  5 1 5 and 5 2 6     3 4 11   Connecting a USB Audio Device  The USB audio device is automatically detected by the Axel terminal     The use of an audio device is enabled disabled per session  See Chapters  5 1 5 and 5 2 6     3 4 12   Listing Connected USB Devices    To list all connected USB devices  supported or not  select the menu   Diagnostic   USB   For more information see Chapter 9 4     58 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    3 5   SETTING AUXILIARY AND LOGICAL PORTS    Three types of p
88. AXEL Platine Terminal  AX3000 Models 65  70  75  80 and 85    USER S MANUAL    April 2011   Ref   AX3E 0826 5    The reproduction of this material  in part or whole  is strictly prohibited  For  additional information  please contact     AXEL    14 Avenue du Qu  bec  B  t  K2 EVOLIC   BP 728  91962 Courtaboeuf cedex   FRANCE  Tel   33 1 69 28 27 27  Fax  33 1 69 28 82 04  Email  info axel com    The information related to firmware 0826f in this document is subject to change  without notice  AXEL assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear  in this document     All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective  holders          2009 2011   AXEL   All Rights Reserved     TABLE OF CONTENT    INTRODUGTION              2           ececcedeteantedecstancdeteanstgiecescctebeeectdescudasts 1  1   INTRODUCTION TO THE AX3000                           eese essen enne nnns 5  1 1  TERMINAL  MODELS iip catt pa ter ed e RR RE gs 6  1 25 MAIN FUNCTIONS iiie tete eet A a 7  121   Network FUNCIONS ouni oi mca                   7  1 2 2   Terminal FUNCIO ine E Re kd e ae oki        7  1 2 3   Print and Terminal Server                  essen 7  1 2 4   Tools and Statistics                          sees 8   2   INITIAL POWER  ON               5  eiie centi edente net cu ica                    9  2 12 QUICK SET UP       nite m HE rt er E re eterni es 10  2         Fifsl SCIeeniss eiiam         ere here eus 12  2 1 2   Network Connection                    
89. Chapter 2  First Boot Time  When the terminal is powered up for the first time  the Quick Set Up  provides a fast and easy method to configure the AX3000  In addition the  Auto Configuration service is started     Chapter 3  Interactive set up  This is used to set up the terminal   s more advanced features   Multiple  sessions  printers  etc     Chapter 4  Using the AX3000  How to use the multi session feature and shutdown the AX3000     Chapter 5  Installing under Windows  Description of Windows specific features     Chapter 6  Installing under OS 400  Description of 5250 specific features     Chapter 7  Installing under OS 390  Description of 3270 specific features     2 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Introduction    Chapter 8  Installing under Unix Linux  Description of Unix Linux specific features  tty server  multi shell  VNC  Server         Chapter 9  Tools and Statistics  Description of the embedded AX3000 tools  ping  statistics  etc      Chapter 10  Remote Administration  Introduction of AXRM  Axel Remote Management software on Windows   Description of configuring terminals remotely via  telnet  Description of remotely sending a configuration text file to one or multiple  terminals     Appendices   The following appendices give more detailed information   A 1   Using the AX3000 interactive set up  A 2   Network overview  Ethernet address  IP address and routers           DHCP protocol  A 4   DNS protocol  A 5   Remote set up configuration file format  A 6   Axel DHCP
90. Chapter 6 4  OS 400  or the Chapter 7 3  OS 390      The remote administration command parameters are     The name or the IP address of the AX3000     A command  one of the 3 following keywords    setup send   set up an AX3000    setup get   get an AX3000 configuration    ax reboot   reset an AX3000     Note  to access an AX3000 with the rsh command  the IP address of the  AX3000 must already have been set    10 4 1   AX3000 Remote Set Up    To set up an AX3000 remotely  use the  setup send  command  Example for  Unix Linux       rsh axname setup send password    conf file    AX3000   User s Manual 239    Remote Administration AXEL    Notes      The next chapter explains how to create the configuration file conf_file   either using a text editor or using the  setup get  command      an  existing terminal  Appendix A 5 contains a detailed description of the  configuration file      password  specify the password if the set up is password protected     The message  Store set up in progress     is displayed on the  operators console while the remote command is processing  If a connection  problem occurs  a time out error message is displayed     When the configuration has been successfully completed  the message  OK   set up updated   is displayed on the operator s console  If other messages  are displayed  refer to Chapter 10 4 3     The AX3000 must read this new set up before it will take effect  This can be  achieved either by power cycling the AX3000 or by the following  ax 
91. Connecting a Smartcard Reader                      sss 57  3 4 11   Connecting a USB Audio Device                       sss 58  3 4 12   Listing Connected USB Devices                                                      58  3 5   SETTING AUXILIARY AND LOGICAL PORTS                                        59  3 5 1   Setting Up the Ports                          59  3 5 2   Connecting a Printer    sse 63  3 5 3   Connecting a Serial Terminal                        sss 65  3 5 4   Connecting other Peripherals                      see 66  3 5 5   Using a Serial Port as the Main Port of a Session                            66  3 5 6 5 Other USOS inii do eti n e e o E e e ang 67  3 6   TERMINAL LOCAL DESKTOP    68  3 6 1   Session Manager                  sss eene enne nnne 69  3 6 2  gt  Status  LING i  sisi e ii E ele I E Re os e PER A a 69  3 6 3   Multi Session Keystroke                   sese 70  3  OTHER FUNCTIONS  i rene e doe e ded qus 71           c PUTING ss ots sete etie roi n e aet e      71  3 7 2   Auto Configuration                 essei enne nennen 71  8 7 3   Factory Settings    in e ar i n 72  3 7 4   License                  ie e e eh ran gne Sue 72  3 7 5   Smartcard Readers                                               72    4   USING THE AX3000                      eese eene enne nennen nnns nnne tnn n nnns 7      4 1   SWITCHING ON THE                                                            74    4 1 1   Session Manager  Classic Mode                     ss
92. DHCP server is available its IP address is shown in the status line           Auto conf    DHCP  aaa bbb ccc ddd         AX3000   User s Manual 19          Initial Power On AXEL    The terminal passes to stage 3    2 2 3   Stage 3  Sending requests to AxRM    After obtaining an IP address via DHCP negotiation the terminal must start  communicating with the AxRM server     This presents a challenge because the terminal must determine both the IP  address and the TCP port of the AxRM server     The recommended way is to configure the DHCP server to send this  information in addition to the AX3000 IP address  This information  IP address  and port  can easily be entered into the DHCP server by using the vendor ID  fields   Axel DHCP option      For more information about  Axel DHCP option  please consult the Appendix  A 6     a  Determining the TCP port   If DHCP sends a port number this is used    If no value is received a default value of port 80 is used   b  Determining IP address    Method 1   If the IP address or DNS name is given by the DHCP server  through  Axel DHCP option  then this is the information the terminal uses to locate  the AxRM server     Method 2   If DHCP does not supply these values the terminal will try to resolve a   hardwired  DNS name  axrmserv    If the name is resolved the terminal can find the AxRM server  The name  axrmserv must be configured within DNS to resolve to the IP address of  the AxRM PC  A DNS alias can be used to allow the AxRM PC to ha
93. Failure    The lease time must be regularly re negotiated  except if the IP address has  been offered by a BOOTP server      If a re negotiation fails the following dialog box is displayed     WARNING  DHCP REBINDING TOO LONG    The AX3000 could be disconnected in 2 minutes  Please log off before automatic shutdown    Press  lt F11 gt  to clear this message       This indicates that in two minutes the AX3000 will be no longer be permitted to  use the leased IP address and the session will be terminated    If after these two minutes  the re negotiation has still failed  the following dialog  box is displayed     DHCP REBINDING FAILED    Please contact your network administrator       Press  lt F11 gt  to reboot  All current sessions  telnet  tty          etc   will have been closed  i e  lost    Note  the AX3000 Trace Mode allows a trace of data exchanged between the    AX3000 and the DHCP server  see Chapter 3 1   This is useful to diagnose  problems     A 4   THE DNS PROTOCOL    The DNS protocol  Domain Name System  allows names to be  resolved  by the  AX3000  Resolving is retrieving an IP address associated with a name     258 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    A 4 1   Overview    A domain  computer network  can be considered as a tree  with branches   nodes  such as hubs  switches  routers  print servers etc  and leafs  for  example PCs  terminals and printers     The domain system makes no distinction between the use of interior nodes and  the leafs  and this doc
94. NS server  which is able to resolve the required name     The resolution operation depends on the number of DNS servers  These are  the steps for a one server resolution and a two server resolution     One DNS Server   1  A DNS request is sent to the server   2  In event of no response  this request is sent again  4 times max     3   In event of negative answer  the resolution is aborted   4  If other requests can be sent  default DNS domains are defined   go  back to step 1     AX3000   User s Manual 261    Appendix AXEL    Two DNS Servers    1  A DNS request is sent to the server 1    2  In event of no response from server 1  this request is sent to the server  2    3  In event of no response from server 2  go back to step 1  4 times max      4  In event of negative answer from any server  the resolution is aborted    5  If other requests can be sent  using default DNS domains are defined    go back to step 1     Example  looking at the screen shots of the Chapter 3 1  these are the DNS  requests sent to resolve  as400  with 2 DNS servers and 2 default DNS  domains  of course this process is stopped if one DNS server sends back a  positive response        as400 servers axel com  to DNS server 1      as400 servers axel com  to DNS server 2      as400 terminals axel com  to DNS server 1      as400 terminals axel com  to DNS server 2      as400  to DNS server 1      as400  to DNS server 2    c  Messages Displayed on the AX3000 Screen    To open a session the AX3000 must resolv
95. OOTP AND                                      289  A 9 1   Declaring and Enabling TFTP and                                              290  A 9 2   Downloading by TFTP Protocol                       see 292     9 3   Downloading by BOOTP and TFTP Protocols                               294  A 9 4   The Download                                                        296  A 9 5   In Event of difficulties                        essen 297  A 10   MORE INFORMATION                                  na        eese ski eral an is 299  A 10 1   Reload Factory Settings                     sse 299  A 10 2   General Level  Advanced                                                                299  A 10 3   Session Level  Enhanced                                                                3038  A 10 4   RDP ICA Sessions  Microsoft Keyboard Codes                           306  A 10 5     Displaying Text Session in Graphics Mode                                 308  A 11   HARDWARE AND FIRMWARE INFORMATION                                 312  A 11 1   Hardware Information                     esses         312    A 11 2   Firmware Information                  ceca 313    AXEL Introduction    INTRODUCTION    AX3000   User s Manual 1    Introduction AXEL    This manual provides details on terminal operation  maintenance and set up   The manual is organized into the following chapters and appendices     Chapter 1  Introduction to the AX3000  Introduction to the AX3000   s main features     
96. P server is found and correctly set up  an IP address  and  subsequently other parameters are given to the AX3000      Before accepting the IP address the AX3000 can be set to check that the  IP address given really is free  ARP protocol       The IP address offered is given temporarily  This duration is called the     Lease Time         If a lease time has been entered through the AX3000 Set Up  this lease  time is offered to the DHCP server  which may or may not accept this  value      The AX3000 is expected to renew its lease before the lease expires   Once the lease has expired the AX3000 is no longer permitted to use the  assigned IP address      Generally an IP address is dynamically assigned out of a pool of IP  addresses  However static IP addresses can be associated to AX3000s   for instance when the AX3000   s print server is used   This association is  performed either by using the AX3000 Ethernet address or by using a     Client Identifier     which is a character string entered through the AX3000  Set Up      The DHCP protocol can be considered as a superset of the BOOTP  protocol  IP addresses can also be offered to AX3000s by a BOOTP  server  in this case the    lease time    is infinite       The AX3000 DHCP client protocol is compliant with RFCs 1533 and  1541     This section deals only with the AX3000 DHCP protocol use  To set up and  enable a DHCP server please read your operating system s manual     A 3 2   Setting Up the AX3000    DHCP protocol is set th
97. Record  Locator    P  Process   The status symbols are described in the following tables     Connection Symbols       Symbol   Meaning       S Connection with host is established       Connection is non SNA       Connection to an application  Lu Lu                 im      Connection to the system  not an application        176 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 390                                                       Keyboard Symbols  Symbol   Meaning  X    Keyboard is disabled  x Only  lt Enter gt  is disabled  X    gt  Error  too much data entered  Press   Reset    X   NUM   Error  numeric value must be entered  Press   Reset    X    t Error  invalid cursor position  Press   Reset    Mode Symbols  Symbol   Meaning  t  lt Shift gt  is currently pressed or the keyboard is in Caps Lock  mode    The insert mode is enabled   lt Inser gt  key   R The  Record  mode is set  see Chapter 6 2 3   P The  Process  mode is set  see Chapter 6 2 3   LL cc  LL and CC indicate the row and column where the cursor is  located             7 2 2   Using a PC AT Keyboard  102 105 keys     The IBM 3270 emulation enables a PC AT keyboard to be used for operation as  a 3270 terminal     The first twelve 3270 function keys are accessed through  lt F1 gt  to  lt F12 gt   The  F13 to F24 function keys are accessed through  lt Shift gt  lt F1 gt  to  lt Shift gt  lt F12 gt      AX3000   User s Manual    177    Installing under OS 390 AXEL    The following table lists the other useful ke
98. Series     This chapter is dedicated to the operation of the AX3000 in the OS 390  environment  For more general information about the AX3000  network and  session settings  instructions for users  etc  please refer to the previous  chapters     7 1   3270 SCREEN SESSION    The IBM 3270 emulation type developed by Axel provides all the features of an  IBM 3270 terminal  Especially     The 3270 telnet protocol  TN3270   compliant with the RFC 1646     Enhanced 3270 telnet protocol  TN3270E   compliant with the RFC 2355     The device type negotiated by the AX3000 is IBM 3278 2 E     Color support     Screen sizes  80x24  80x32  80x43 and 132x27     3270 status line     168 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 390    7 1 1   Setting a Session    To set a profile session  enter the AX3000 Set Up and select the   Configuration   Sessions   Session X  menu  where X is the session  number to be configured   The following box is displayed     Connection Parameters  3270  no server   lt Space gt   Session Parameters     lt Space gt    lt Space gt      lt Space gt      lt Space gt        These parameters are      Type  select  3270      Server  press   Space   to select the server from a list     Connection Properties  pressing   Space   displays a dialog box which  lets certain connection parameters be changed  See Chapter 7 1 4     Terminal Name  DEVNAME   this optional name identifies the terminal  connection at the OS 390 level      Display Parameters  press   Space 
99. Syn sent  connection request in progress     Time Wait  connection close in progress     Local Socket  IP address and TCP port for the AX3000     Remote Socket  IP address and TCP port for the host     Rev Q  number of bytes received by the AX3000 and not yet processed    Snd Q  number of bytes not yet sent to the host    AX3000   User s Manual 229    Tools and Statistics AXEL    Example of a Counter box     TCP Client Statistics    GENERAL ERRORS    REFRESH       9 3   ETHERNET INTERFACE INFORMATION  9 3 1   Status    Checking the interface status could be needed when using DHCP and or DNS   The following information is displayed when selecting the  Configuration     Network   Ethernet Interface   Status  menu     Ethernet Interface    Connection    IP Parameters    Other Information     lt Space gt      lt Space gt     REFRESH       Note  this box information is automatically updated every 5 seconds  To force  an update use the  REFRESH  button        230 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Tools and Statistics    In the above dialog box  the following information is given     Link  speed and type the network interface  useful when set in auto   sense mode      IP parameters  IP address  netmask and default router    FQDN  terminal full name    9 3 2   DHCP DNS    The DHCP DNS box is the following     DHCP Client    DNS Server Update by the Terminal           REFRESH       In the above dialog box  the following information is given     State  the current DHCP state  The possible
100. SystemRoot  system32 cmd exe    88 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows      Working Directory  available only if  Auto Run  is set to  yes    sets  program working directory   Example           5 1 5   Redirected Resources    The redirected resources mechanism allows one or more local resources to be     published    to the Windows server  These resources are available only for the  terminal s user  They are created on the Windows server when the connection  is established and removed when the session is disconnected     The following local resources are supported      Printers  before being redirected each printer must be declared at the     physical connection port level  See first sub section a  then c       COM LPT ports before being redirected each port must be declared at  the physical port level  See first sub section b  then c       Mass storage devices  see sub section c       Smartcard readers  see sub section c      Audio  see sub section c     Note  printer redirection requires a Windows 2000 server  minimum   For other  resources  a Windows 2003 service is required  except for Audio where a  Windows 2008 server is strongly advised      a  Declaring a Redirected Printer    At the RDP ICA connection time a redirected printer will be automatically added  to the Windows spooler  It will be removed when the session disconnects     Before being redirected an RDP ICA printer must be declared at the  physical    connection port  level  The available p
101. Time to Live  Parameter    This parameter controls the    to live    time of the datagram to prevent it being  looped forever due to routing errors  Routers decrement the TTL of every  datagram as it traverses from one network to another  When its value reaches 0  the packet is dropped     This parameter doesn t impact the AX3000 performance     e  The  TCP port Assignment  Parameter    The AX3000 resources  screen sessions and auxiliary ports  are identified by  numeric values called TCP ports     The TCP port assignment can be either random or fixed  The default value  depends on the current network service     The random method means the AX3000 TCP ports are different after every re   boot  On booting the AX3000 generates a new base value  This value  x  is  between 1024 and 3072  For each session a range of 8 TCP ports is given   session 1    x  x 7   session 2    x 8   x 15     When a connection is  established the next port of the associated range is used  After 8 connections   the same TCP port of a range is re used     304 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    The main benefit of this method is that if the AX3000 is suddenly powered off   power cut for example   at the next boot time  the connections are immediately  accepted by the server   i e  the sessions are hooked on different sockets  because the TCP ports are different   However this does create    phantom     sessions  as the initial sessions are still active from the server s perspective   and must be k
102. User Rights Assignment Administrator     G3                 Accounts  Rename quest account Guest  H E Public Key Policies P AN T    g      Software Restriction Policies udt  Audit the access of global system objects Disabled  B 3 IP Security Policies on Local Computer Audit  Audit the use of Backup and Restore privilege Disabled  Audit  Shut down system immediately if unable to log security audits Disabled    Allow undock without having to log on Enabled    Allowed to format and eject removable media Administrators    Prevent users from installing printer drivers Enabled    Restrict CD ROM access to locally logged on user only Disabled    Restrict floppy access to locally logged on user only Disabled    Unsigned driver installation behavior Warn but allow inst     Not Defined   Domain controller  LDAP server signing requirements Not Defined     Domain controller  Refuse machine account password changes Not Defined   Domain member  Digitally encrypt or sign secure channel data  always  Enabled   Domain member  Digitally encrypt secure channel data  when possible  Enabled   Domain member  Digitally sign secure channel data  when possible  Enabled   Domain member  Disable machine account password changes Disabled       Maximum machine account password age 30 days  88  Domain member  Require strong  Windows 2000 or later  session key Disabled  Re interactive logon  Do not display last user name Disabled  Re Interactive logon  Do not require CTRL ALT DEL Disabled  Interactive logo
103. When a value is specified  the ICA request is sent to  the entered IP address or name  unicast mode   In event of failure  the ICA request is sent again in broadcast mode  Entering a server  IP address will not force the session to connect to that server  but it  will allow the terminal to locate the farm      TCP Port  with  HTTP   TCP IP  mode  the default value is 80 and can  be modified  With  TCP IP  mode the value is 1604 and can t be modified      Use Alternate Address  set it to  Yes  when a firewall is present      Trace Mode  not available for HTTP   TCP IP mode   only use in event  of problems during ICA browsing     c  ICA Browsing Examples   Example 1  HTTP   TCP IP mode   With the Round Robin DNS mechanism  the all the Citrix servers may be  resolved with a single DNS name  ica   In this case  the ICA browsing default  settings allow servers or published applications to be listed  Otherwise the IP    address  or a DNS name  of one of the server of the Citrix must be specified     Example 2  TCP IP mode  the terminal belongs to the same network as the  Citrix farm    The ICA browsing default values should allow the server or application list to be  built   Broadcasted ICA request will be received and processed by ICA servers      Example 3  TCP IP mode  the terminal and the Citrix farm are on separate  networks    With the default values the ICA browsing will fail as the broadcast requests will    be blocked by routers  The IP address  or a DNS name  of one of th
104. Windows operating system or  applications they are not meant to access  They may also be able to change  setup and configuration parameters     AxMenu allows users access only to applications the administrator has  authorized and is often a much more user friendly method to control access as  compared to restricting Window s user profiles    The administrator creates a profile for each user which sets the appearance of    AX3000   User s Manual 135    Installing under Windows AXEL    the screen  Menu  Tool bar or Desktop  and applications available     Example of  Menu   the menu is displayed in the centre of the screen     Axel RDP Menu       Word Processing    Internet    Spread Sheet    EN                  Example of                  the tool bar displayed along the top of the screen    ie  S a  1019    AXEL       Example of    Desktop     a task bar is displayed at the bottom of the screen       Click Here to Start      For more information about the AxMenu utility  read the manual  Axel Menu    Publishing Applications and Securing the Desktop for Windows TSE      5 9   REMOTE ADMINISTRATION  5 9 1   Remote Control    This functionality allows an administrator to remotely take control of a terminal    136 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    connected to a Windows or Citrix server  The administrator can passively watch  the users screen or actively take control with his own keyboard and mouse for  various support or administration purposes     The fo
105. XT option     By default the Screen Type is set to TFT  A CRT type can be selected  It s used  only for displaying text base session in 132 column mode     e  The  Frequency  Parameter   By default the Frequency is set to 60Hz  An alternate value is available  75Hz    f  The  Administrator Hot Keys disabled  Parameter   This parameter allows certain AX3000 hot keys to be disabled  possibly useful if  the terminal is installed in public places  For example  this prevents a user from    invoking   Ctrl     Alt     Del   function  For more information  see Chapter 4 6     Note  when this parameter is set to  yes   the  consultation mode  and the   super password  don t allow the set up to be entered     9g  The  Supplemental Signals to Handle  Parameter    The AX3000 checks the printer status by reading both the  Busy  and  Select   In  signals before printing     The AX3000 will not transmit data for printing if the printer handles only the   Busy  signal     This parameter determines whether the  Select In  and or  Paper Empty   signals will be selected in addition to the  Busy  signal  which is always used      AX3000   User s Manual 301    Appendix AXEL    Note  the signal modification takes immediately effect   h  The  Operating Mode  Parameter    Data is usually sent to the parallel port through a method based on    interrupts      This makes efficient use of the AX3000 CPU     In event of problems  no printing or a very slow printing   it is possible to change    this par
106. al 65    Interactive Set Up AXEL    3 5 4   Connecting other Peripherals  The Unix Linux tty service provides bi directional control of the device     Note  only the two serial auxiliary ports are bidirectional  For other ports   parallel and logical ports  the tty service acts as a unidirectional service     To set the tty service on the port  enter the following parameters in the   Configuration   Ports   xxx   yyy  dialog box      Service  select tty      Parameters  press  lt Space gt  to access the following box     no s  2048   No   lt Space gt          Server  name of the server selected from a menu  see Chapter 3 1 3      TCP Port  numeric identifier of the tty service on the target server   The TCP Port default value is 2048      Auto Reconnection  if this parameter is set to  yes  a new  connection is automatically established after a disconnection   Otherwise  the AX3000 must be power cycled      Enhanced parameters  see Appendix A 10 3     Note  Axel provides a Unix Linux utility called axtty by which pseudo devices    dev ttypx  may be linked to the AX3000 serial ports  The AX3000 ports appear  as local UNIX   dev xxx  ports  For more information  see Chapter 5 4     3 5 5   Using a Serial Port as the Main Port of a Session    A screen session can be associated with a serial port  This session now  connects as a serial dumb terminal     Serial and TCP IP screen sessions can be used at the same time     For more information see Chapter 8 1 2  sub section d      66
107. allel port management and to send data by a  polling  method  To enable  this method  set the  Operating Mode  parameter to  Standard      Note  the parallel port management modification takes immediately effect    i  The  Transmit FIFO  AUX1 and AUX2 ports  Parameter   The AUX1 and AUX2 ports provide an embedded transmit buffer  FIFO   This  allows the data transmission to be optimized  By default this mechanism is    enabled     If necessary this parameter allows the AUX1  or AUX2  FIFO buffer to be  disabled     Note  the FIFO modification takes immediately effect   j  The  Number of Sessions  Parameter    This parameter is the maximum number of concurrent connections  Its value is  from 1 to 6     k  The  Number of Pages per Session  Parameter    This parameter allows multi page support  This may be used by legacy text  application under Unix Linux     Important  the  Number of Sessions  multiplied per the  Number of Pages per  Session  must not exceed 6     1  The  Choose Portrait Landscape  Parameter    When this option is set  printer string sequences can be entered for the  default    302 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    printer port  and printer services  LPD  Prt3270      These sequences allow a  portrait landscape mode to be selected via a terminal status line icon  see  Chapter 4 1 2      A 10 3   Session Level  Enhanced Parameters   Each session  screen or auxiliary port  offers enhanced parameters  These  parameters are available through the  Connectio
108. are    To download an AX3000 firmware through TFTP       gt  RUNRMTCMD CMD  AX DOWNLOAD password  axfirm ax3000 192 168 1 180         RMTLOCNAME  192 168 1 241   IP     To download an AX3000 firmware through BOOTP and TFTP         gt  RUNRMTCMD CMD  AX DOWNLOAD password  axfirm ax3000 192 168 1 180         Parameters of the RUNRMTCMD command    AX DOWNLOAD   Command for firmware downloading     password   Required if the set up is password protected      axfirm ax3000   Path and name of the firmware file     192 168 1 180   AS 400 IP address     192 168 1 241   AX3000 IP address     Messages are displayed on the target AX3000  See Chapter 11 4    f  Editing AX3000 Statistics    Some AX3000 statistics can be obtained by invoking the following command         RUNRMTCMD CMD AX GETSTAT  RMTLOCNAME  192 168 1 241   IP     Where    AX GETSTAT   Command for getting statistics     192 168 1 241   AX3000 IP address     6 5   FURTHER OPTIONS    6 5 1   Turning Off the AX3000    Care should be taken before turning off the TCP IP AX3000 as the AS 400  cannot detect a TCP IP device being turned off   For graceful terminal  shutdown use the  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Del gt  keystroke combination     AX3000   User s Manual 165    Installing under OS 400 AXEL    6 5 2   Reconnection Problem    If      AX3000 5250 session is set with a specific DEVNAME  problems can  occur if it is not cleanly shutdown before being switched off     If the terminal is powered off without signing off first the
109. are  reset to their factory default values     The    quick set up    guides the user through a setup menu in an intuitive manner     10 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Initial Power On    The dialog box structure  referred to as a Wizard  is shown below        FIRST SCREEN  Graphical Environment  Session Type                      Testing Graphical Settings  optional                                                                                 SERIAL CONNECTION NETWORK CONNECTION  Main port  baudrate  data     Ethernet Interface  Default printer Server Settings   REBOOT     CITRIX SESSION CITRIX SESSION Other type  Published App  or Published App  of sessions  Published Server Desktop   DEVICE   Printer  USB Drive     SUMMARIZE                AX3000   User s Manual 11    Initial Power On AXEL    Note  the following keystrokes are available in the set up  for more information  see Appendix A 1        lt Arrows gt   moving selection within menus or dialog boxes      lt Enter gt   validating a value or a button      lt Esc gt   cancels current field  same as using               button       lt Space gt   lists of options      lt Tab gt   shortcut to buttons on the bottom of the dialog box    2 1 1   First Screen    This first screen allows the session type to be selected     Terminal  French  TFT Flat Screen  1024x768    High Color  16 bit   axe 12C007B    No  Session  None       These parameters are      Keyboard  keyboard nationality  The value selected is used from there  on
110. are the number of correct frames   transmitted and received     Errors  this section gives the type and the number of errors  No errors should  be shown in a good working environment healthy network     232 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Tools and Statistics    9 4   USB STATISTICS    The  Diagnostics   USB  menu lists the connected USB devices  For example    1   USB Flash Memory       For each line the number is the USB physical port number  The associated  label is given by the USB product itself     If the USB product is supported  more information can obtained by pressing   lt Enter gt   If a beep is sounded the product is not supported     AX3000   User s Manual 233    AXEL Remote Administration      10   REMOTE ADMINISTRATION    AX3000   User s Manual 235    Remote Administration    AXEL    This chapter covers remote administration of the TCP IP AX3000     Four types of operations are provided by the remote administration       The use of AxRM     The remote control       The interactive telnet setup       The batch set up  getting and sending a set up file     10 1   AXRM  THE AXEL MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE    A Windows administration utility           or Axel Remote Management  is  available at no charge from the Axel Web site  http   www axel com         Axel Remote Management    File Action Advanced Display         Axel Network Device Name    Product Name     IP Address    Hardware Firmware                          2 TSE    2        000    Axel 10 00 01    CC      4000  
111. ble keys  ASCII codes lower than 20h can be  entered as          where xx is the hexadecimal value of the ASCII code   Examples  Escape is MB and   CR   is VOD      Waiting for                          After  password   has been received  the AX3000 sends  mypwd     CR       Note  whilst a login script is running  the AX3000 keyboard is locked  In the  event of a problem  wrong expected token   press  lt Esc gt  to skip the login script  and to unlock the keyboard     8 1 10   The Multi Shell    The AXEL multi shell software allows multiple telnet sessions on the same host   with the same user name  without demanding multiple logons  This is done by    202 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    running the AXEL tcpmsh program from a UNIX shell  This supports up to eight  duplicated sessions     Operating example  you could run four multi shell sessions  or   views     across each of two telnet connections to different hosts  Function keystroke    combinations could be used to hot key between the different telnet connections    lt Alt gt  lt Fx gt   and different multi shell views   lt Ctrl gt  lt Fx gt       a  Installation    Copy to  usr bin and rename as    tcpmsh    the appropriate binary  Example for  IBM AIX     b  Setting Up the AX3000    Use of multiple views within a single telnet session must be set through the  AX3000 set up     The AX3000 supports eight virtual screens  which may be shared  between  telnet sessions and multi shell views  In 
112. bled  enabled     disabled  enabled     numeric     character string  60 char max     character string  60 char max         local server      ICA server      published application      character string  64 char max      character string  64 char max      TCP IP   HTTP   TCP IP     1604   numeric     broadcast   IP   Name     yes   no     yes   no     character string  64 char max      yes   no     character string  48 char max      character string  16 char max      character string  64 char max      yes   no     character string  128 char max     character string  128 char max     basic     character string  20 char max         281    Appendix AXEL    s _ica_mouseaccel no  s _ica_compression yes   s  ica msesensitivity high  s  ica msereport all   s  ica prnredir all   s  ica prndef no   S  ica comredir all   5  ica usbdriveredir    55 ica scardredir   s  ica scardauto   S         masterbr 192 168 1 107  S  vdk portbr 80   S  vdk username    S  vdk autologon no   ds  vdk enpassword    S  vdk password    S  vdk domain        s  vdk encryption basic    s _vdk_connectionname   S  vdk remotectl no   S  vdk remotecad yes  s _vdk_prnredir all   S  vdk prndef no  s _vdk_comredir all   55 vdk usbdriveredir no  S    S  vdk scardauto no    _vdk_scardredir no    s _ica_soundredir yes           S  ica soundquality high  S  vdk cachebitmap no   s  vdk compression yes   S         msereport all   s  vdk msesensitivity high  S  vdk bckg   s _vdk_wincontent        S  vdk animation     282   
113. cel   Apply      Note  the changes take immediately effect     A 6 3    axrmserv  option  auto configuration    The axrmserv option always the network location of the AxRM server to be  broadcast     The format is as follows           axrmserv paraml param2       286 AX3000   User s Manual       AXEL Appendix    The parameters are     The IP address or DNS name of the AxRM server    The TCP port AxRM is listening on    Having two parameters is not mandatory nor is the order important  For  example you may only need to enter the IP address if the default port 80 is  being used     The table below gives examples                             AxRM Network Location  IP address TCP port  axrmserv mypc  82            DNS resolution 82  axrmserv  82 The IP address will be given by 82  the method 2 or 3  see chapter  2 1    axrmserv 192 168 0 1  192 168 0 1 80       A 7   SETTING THE IP ADDRESS BY A PING COMMAND    A new feature with version  e  firmware enables the system manager to  remotely assign an initial IP address to a brand new terminal  or remotely  change an existing IP address     The procedure is to manually modify the ARP table of your computer  Unix   Linux  Windows     An ARP table entry is composed of IP addresses and  Ethernet MAC addresses  The command below associates an arbitrary IP  address to the terminal s hard coded MAC address  The MAC address is  printed on the base of each terminal  With its updated ARP table your computer  is able to access the AX3000 To se
114. ct the key label then press  lt Space gt    The following dialog box is displayed        The main field is used to enter the programmable key value  ASCII codes lower  than 20h can be entered as          where xx is the hexadecimal value of the  ASCII code      Note  for the  Backspace  key and the numeric pad dot  a toggle is only  available  two possible values for each key      Memory usage is limited to 256 bytes maximum per key   c  Key Mapping    This function allows any key to be remapped into any value  only available for  ASCII keyboard mode     AX3000   User s Manual 193    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    Select  Key Mapping  within the  Session Profile  box and press  lt Space gt  to  display the following box     Key Mapping    CANCEL       Up to 20 sequences can be remapped  from  1 to  20      To program a new sequence  or to modify an existing one  select the sequence  number and press  lt Space gt   The following dialog box is displayed     Key Mapping  1    Press the key s  you want to program    CANCEL       194 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    Enter the keystroke to be remapped  parameter Key s  Sequence      Other parameters      Associated String  enter the value associated with the key sequence   ASCII codes lower than 20h can be entered as   xx   where xx is the  hexadecimal value of the ASCII code       Direction  two possible values     Remote  when the key sequence is pressed  the  Associated  String  is sent to the s
115. d COM   Then select     Printer Parameters  and press   Space    The following box is displayed     Generic   Text Only    15       These parameters are      Printer Name  name of the Windows printer   User definable      Windows TSE Driver  printer driver name  It is ESSENTIAL that the  value entered here matches the printer driver name exactly as installed  on the server  If the match is not exact Windows will not be able to  connect the printer to the driver and the printer will not be added to the  Windows spooler      Time out  sec   in event of a printer error  no paper  off line  etc    this is  the delay before the terminal reports the error to Windows     The printer declaration is completed  For the redirection procedure  consult the    AX3000   User s Manual 103    Installing under Windows AXEL    sub section c    b  Declaring a Redirected COM LPT Port    A redirected COM LPT port will be  seen  as a local Windows COM LPT port   Maximum two ports can be redirected     Before being redirected an RDP ICA COM Port must be declared at the     physical port  level  The available ports are  auxiliary ports  parallel  Aux1 and  Aux2  and USB logical ports     Select the dialog box of the  Connection port   menu  Configuration   Ports     xxx    For example  the Aux1 port     Serial Port fux1    Line Parameters   Printer  9600  8 1 No  No  High  High  None    fissociated Service    RDP ICA Redirection       Set the  Active  parameter to  As COM port  or  As Printer and COM
116. d nationality to be negotiated with the TSE server     The following table lists the available keyboard codes                    Keyboard Nationality Code Keyboard Nationality Code  Afrikaans 0436 Icelandic 040F  Albanian 041C Indonesian 0421                      306 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix                                                                                                                                     Arabic   United Arab Emirates   3801 Italian   Italy 0410  Arabic   Bahrain 3C01 Italian   Switzerland 0810  Arabic   Algeria 1401 Japanese 0411  Arabic   Egypt 0C01 Korean 0412  Arabic   Iraq 0801 Latvian 0426  Arabic   Jordan 2C01 Lithuanian 0427  Arabic   Kuwait 3401 Macedonian  FYROM  042F  Arabic   Lebanon 3001 Malay   Malaysia 043E  Arabic   Libya 1001 Malay     Brunei 083E  Arabic   Morocco 1801 Maltese 043A  Arabic   Oman 2001 Marathi 044E  Arabic   Qatar 4001 Norwegian   Bokml 0414  Arabic   Saudi Arabia 0401 Norwegian   Nynorsk 0814  Arabic   Syria 2801 Polish 0415  Arabic   Tunisia 1001 Portuguese   Portugal 0816  Arabic   Yemen 2401 Portuguese   Brazil 0416  Armenian 042B Raeto Romance 0417  Azeri   Latin 042C Romanian   Romania 0418  Azeri   Cyrillic 082C Romanian   Moldova 0818  Basque 042D Russian 0419  Belarusian 0423 Russian   Moldova 0819  Bulgarian 0402 Sanskrit 044F  Catalan 0403 Serbian   Cyrillic 0C1A  Chinese   China 0804 Serbian   Latin 081A  Chinese   Hong Kong SAR 0C04 Setsuana 0432  Chinese   Macau SAR 1404 Slovenian 
117. d rate  format      service and RDP ICA redirection  For more information  see Chapter 3 5 1     3 4 8   Connecting a Touch Screen  A USB touch screen may be seen by the terminal     Either as a pointer device   Or as an USB RS232 adaptor  In this case a logical USB port is  automatically created  see Chapter 3 4 7      In both cases  to set up the touch screen  select the menu  Configuration     General   Miscellaneous   For more information see Chapter 3 2 2     3 4 9   Connecting a Mass Storage Device    Note  only available with the firmware option MSC     AX3000   User s Manual 55    Interactive Set Up AXEL    Most USB mass storage devices fall in one of the categories below     memory sticks     hard drives     CD DVD readers     floppy disks     memory card readers     digital cameras     The main difference between these devices is the type of file system  i e the  format in which the data is stored      IMPORTANT  only mass storage devices formatted in FAT12  FAT16  FAT32           ISO9660 are supported     For your information the following table lists the most common file systems for  each device type      supported by a PC or Axel  o  supported only by a PC      USB Mass Storage Device  FAT  NTFS  exFAT bs 9660 EJ                                           Memory Sticks             Hard Drive             CD DVD Readers       V   o      Floppy Disk          Digital Cameras                Memory Card Readers   Y                          File systems generally used on
118. dex  for instance  0826c      STD stands for    Standard     In event of firmware option additional codes  follow  MSC  Mass Storage Class   SCA  SmartCard   TXT  support of  the legacy text mode        Note  three parameters depend on the firmware nationality       The set up message nationality  FR  French messages  other  English  messages      AX3000   User s Manual 313    Appendix AXEL      The possible presence of a national keyboard and associated character  set  For instance  the Turkish environment  keyboards and character set   is only available with the  TR  firmware      The default keyboard nationality  FR  France  XX  North American  TR   Turkey  etc      314 AX3000   User s Manual    PERSONAL NOTES    AXEL    14 Avenue du Qu  bec  B  t  K2 EVOLIC   BP 728  91962 Courtaboeuf cedex   FRANCE  Tel   33 1 69 28 27 27   Fax  33 1 69 28 82 04   Email  info axel com    
119. e 75  4 1 2   Session Manager  Desktop                                                             76  4 2   USING MULTIPLE SESSIONS                  sese 77  4 2 1   Opening and Switching Sessions                      sss 77  4 2 2   Disconnecting Sessions                   sese 78  4 3  LOCKING THE SCREEN              serere nennen 78  4 4    COPY PASTE  FUNCTION 2      79  4 5  TURNING OFF THE AX3000          0 ccecceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesaeseeeeeeeneees 81  4 6   AX3000 HOT KEYS            tt eet e rte e i ities 82  5   INSTALLING UNDER                                                                entrent 83  5 1                           9  0                            a haa      84  5 1 1   Setting Up      RDP Session                    sse 85  5 1 2   Display Parameters                      aa e E a 86  5 1 3   RDP Additional Parameters                     sse 86  5 1 4   Automatic Logon and Auto Run                 s sessi 88  5 1 5   Redirected Fiesources                   sees 89  5 1 6   BarndWidth    s    cen f dedi ita a e          94  5 1 7   Connection                                                                    95  5 2 ICA  SCREEN SESSION    iru e ero ORE ped 96  5 2 1   Setting Up an ICA Session                     sse 96  5 2 2   Connection Types and ICA Browser             5                                  97  5 2 3   Display Parameters                   sse eee 100  5 2 4   ICA Additional Parameters                     sse 100  5 2 5   Aut
120. e a file called  myscript bat      106 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows      Enter the  net use  command line as required in this file     Edit the user account properties by selecting the  profile  tab and set the   Logon script  to read the  myscript bat  file   For more details see Windows help on Netlogon     5 2 7   Bandwidth    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Bandwidth  and press  lt Space gt   The  following box is displayed        These parameters are      Compression  this allows Windows to send compressed data  This  optimizes bandwidth but in some cases can decrease overall  performance     JPEG Decoding  this allows Windows to send JPEG bitmaps  This  optimizes bandwidth but in some cases can decrease overall  performance      Mouse Traffic  the options are      All  default   all mouse events  clicks and position  are sent to the  server      Click  only the click events are sent to the server  This reduces the  data flow  But the mouse cursor is not updated in real time  This  mode can significantly improve bandwidth      Mouse Sensitivity  This setting varies the sample rate of the mouse  If  the sensitivity is increased the mouse movement will be more fluid  but  also network activity is increased      Audio Quality  the bandwidth depends on the audio quality  For remote  connections prefer a low quality     AX3000   User s Manual 107    Installing under Windows AXEL    5 2 8   Connection Properties    Within the  Session Profi
121. e gt   The following box is displayed     No  No  1 VNC     lt Space gt        These parameters are      Auto Connection  if this parameter is set to  yes   the connection will be  automatically established when the AX3000 is powered  Otherwise  the  user can press  lt Alt gt  lt Fx gt  to establish the connection      Auto Reconnection  if this parameter is set to  yes   a new connection is  automatically established after a disconnection  Otherwise  the user can  press   Alt     Fx   to establish    new connection      Session Label  this character string  11 characters max   is used to  identify the session within the session manger or in the status line      Enhanced parameters  see Appendix A 10 3     206 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    b  Display Parameters    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Display Parameters  and press   lt Space gt   The following box is displayed     Format  Dynamic    High Color  16 bit   no       This box allows display settings  resolution  number of colors and frequency  to  be set  The availability of these parameters depends of the Type value      Dynamic  The Resolution is given by the Xvnc server when the session  is established  If supported  it s accepted by the terminal  Else default  value  from general level  is used      Default  the three parameters  resolution  colors and frequency  are  issued from general settings  see Chapter 3 2 2   When general settings  are modified  these three parameter
122. e has a maximum of eight lines  Each line  lists the ttyp slave part associated with one view      S str  str is the required shell  sh  ksh  etc      X nbr  nbr is the size of each circular buffer associated with one view     When the AXEL multi shell program is run  help messages are displayed   tcpmsh version  maximum number of views  etc     The program creates only the first view  view 1   A pseudo terminal is  automatically associated with this view     This view is a copy  of the shell within which the tcpmsh program was run  and  the  profile script is executed for this view     To create a new view or to move to an existing view  use   Ctrl     Fx       If a view does not already exist  the tcpmsh program allocates a pseudo   terminal  launches the view and runs  profile     To delete a view  move to it   lt Ctrl gt  lt Fx gt   and exit the shell  by typing exit or  pressing  lt Ctrl gt  lt D gt    The tcpmsh software releases the associated pseudo   terminal and moves to the first view     If the deleted view was the only active view  the program terminates     204 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    8 2   GRAPHICAL MODE SESSION  VNC     The VNC protocol enables a remote graphical display on the Axel VNCviewer   The image is constructed  maintained and updated within the Unix server s  frame buffer  and transmitted across the TCP IP network        Note  this protocol is public and the associated software is free  For more  information pleas
123. e see http   www realvnc com     The following is a summary of the VNC terminal declaration  For more  information  please consult  AxGVNC   Configuring VNC Terminals under  Linux     8 2 1   Setting Up a VNC Session    To set up a VNC session  select  Configuration   Sessions   Session X    where X is the session number   The following dialog box is displayed     Connection Parameters  UNC  no server  5901   lt Space gt    lt Space gt   Session Parameters   lt Space gt    lt Space gt        AX3000   User s Manual 205    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    Set the following parameters      Session Type  select  VNC      Server  the server name on which the          daemon is run     TCP Port  numeric value associated with the display  see Chapter 8 2 2       Connection Properties  pressing  lt Space gt  displays a dialog box which  lets certain connection parameters be changed  See sub section a      Password  this allows the optional VNC connection password to be  stored  Note  this is the VNC password   not the user password       Display Parameters  pressing  lt Space gt  allows display settings   resolution and number of colors  to be set  See sub section b      Additional Parameters  pressing  lt Space gt  displays a dialog box which  lets certain VNC parameters be changed  See sub section c     Note  after exiting set up  we advise power cycling the terminal  a  Connection Properties    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Connection Properties  and press   lt Spac
124. e servers of  the Citrix farm must be specified     AX3000   User s Manual 99    Installing under Windows AXEL    5 2 3   Display Parameters    Within the  Session Profile    box  select  Display Parameters  and press   lt Space gt   The following box is displayed     Display Para    Format  Default       This box allows display settings  resolution  number of colors and frequency  to  be set  The availability of these parameters depends of the Type value      Default  these three parameters are issued from general settings  see  Chapter 3 2 2   When general settings are modified  these three  parameters are automatically updated with new values     Customized  the three parameters are independent from general  settings     5 2 4   ICA Additional Parameters    Within the    Session Profile    box  select    Additional Parameters  and press    Space    The following box is displayed           Connection  Basic Level  axel2C007B  Keyboard and Mouse  Remote  Enabled               These parameters            Encryption  the supported encryption protocols are     100 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows      Basic Level  default encryption protocol of Metaframe     RC5  strongest encryption protocol  with different key lengths      Connection Name  this character string identifies the AX3000 within the  Windows Operating System  see CLIENTNAME environment variable    The default value is the terminal name  see Chapter 3 1 1         Ctrl     Alt     Del    the tw
125. e set up      Some set up parameters are not supported by this function  the terminal  name  the passwords  the pre and post printing sequences and the  transparent mode sequences     The substitution commands are            is the parameter  ethernet axname       lt   gt  is the screen session number  1 to 6  or the port session number   AUX1 1  AUX2 2  PARALLEL 3  USB1 4  USB2 5  USB3 6   USB4 7  NET1 8  NET2 9        lt   X Y  gt  is an  ethernet_axname  sub string  start X  length Y     Notes     If X is greater than the  ethernet axname  length  the substring is  empty      f X Y is greater than the  ethernet axname  length the substring  is truncated     In event of syntax error the substitution is not done     Example  if the terminal name is  axel201234      TERM lt   7 4  gt    gt  TERM1234  TERM lt   7 10  gt    gt  TERM1234  TERM lt   20 7  gt    gt  TERM  TERM lt   20 A  gt    gt  TERM lt   20 A  gt      lt   1 2  gt  lt   7 4  gt   lt   gt    gt  ax1234 2  ex   session 2 or AUX2     Ethernet Parameters    thernet_link   Auto sense   10BT HD   10BT FD    100BT HD   100BT FD        AX3000   User s Manual 267    Appendix AXEL                         ethernet_dhcp_used no  yes   no   ethernet_dhcp_netmask   yes   no   ethernet_dhcp_defrouter   yes   no   ethernet_dhcp_DNSserver   yes   no   ethernet_dhcp_srchdomain   yes   no   ethernet_dhcp_leasetime   number   ethernet_dhcp_clientid   character string  10 char max    ethernet_dhcp_userclassid   character string  32
126. e specified log file     8 4 4   The axttyd Mechanism    The axttyd daemon performs the following steps      init stage  association file checking  errors are reported in the log file   and associated ptty opening  masters and slaves      rtty stage  for each rtty association  a child process is created  Each  child process listens on the associated ptty  When data is received a  socket is opened on the AX3000 auxiliary port  Bi directional  communication is then enabled  If no data is sent or received for any one  minute interval  the connection is closed  It will be opened again  the next  time data is received from the ptty     tty stage  when all the rtty child processes are created  the axttyd  daemon listens on the TCP IP socket  generally 2048   For each  connection request  from an AX3000 tty service   a child process is  created  This process controls communication between the ptty and the  AX3000 resource  session or auxiliary port      220 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    8 4 5   Uninstalling    Remove the AXEL files and kill the AXEL tty server process  signal TERM        kill  TERM pid lt CR gt     where pid is the process ID of the AXEL tty server   8 4 6   In Event of Problems       In event of difficulties please consult the logfile   tmp axttylog  and to read the  last messages     a  Message  Can not bind TCP port     The message indicates the axtty TCP port  2048 by default  is currently in use   This port must be released     b
127. e terminal rear    panel this is the main port  if not a third party USB COM adaptor is requested    Note  this component is not supplied by Axel     16 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Initial Power On    Where the session type is  Text Emulation  and connection type is  aux1  the  following box is displayed     Quick Set Up   Serial Hode    XON XOFF  11h 13h   Printer  Parallel    NEXT       These parameters are     Speed  press  lt Space gt  to select the baud rate    Format  press   Space   to select the data format    Handshake for reception  press  lt Space gt  to select the handshake    Default Port  auxiliary port used for local printings     AX3000   User s Manual 17    Initial Power On AXEL    2 1 7   Set Up Summary    At the end of the wizard process  a summary of the selected settings is  displayed  For example     Summary    Terminal  French        12      7     TSE           TCP IP  No  192 168 1 247                     192 168 1 165  Printer  None    USB Drives  Disabled    ACCEPT ADVANCED SETUP       Press the  ACCEPT  button to use these settings  After an automatic reboot the  terminal is ready to be used     The  Advanced  button enters the interactive setup where further configuring is  possible  For example adding different session types     The  BACK  button allows these settings to be changed     2 2   AUTO CONFIGURATION    The Auto Configuration feature allows a brand new    out of the box    terminal to  be sent a specific firmware and or configuration 
128. e the host name  if no IP address  has been associated through the set up      This is a screen shot example when the resolution successes           Connecting to as400 servers axel com 23  Telnet      Session number 1   Resolving      Resolved  192 168 1 180   Connected       Explanation  the AX3000 attempts to resolve  as400 servers axel com   The  resolution process returns the IP address which is 192 168 1 180     262 AX3000   User s Manual       AXEL Appendix    In the event of a problem  the  Resolved  a b c d  message is replaced by an  error message  For example           Connecting to as400 servers axel com 23  Telnet      Session number 1   Resolving      Srv  domain not found   Press  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Shift gt  lt D gt  to close this session       Error messages  error messages reported by the DNS server begins with Srv   Error messages from the terminal begin with  Loc   The main messages are     Srv  domain not found  the name doesn t exist within this domain     Srv  refused query  the DNS servers refuses to respond to the request   This could be due to a DNS server security function     Loc  no DNS server defined  no DNS server has been defined through  the AX3000 Set Up     Loc  name syntax error  the syntax of the name to resolve is not correct   for example two consecutive dots  as400 servers      Loc  timeout  no DNS server responds    Loc  no memory  due to a temporary memory overload  the AX3000 can  not process the name resolution  Retry later  
129. ect the server and press  DELETE      Change a Server  move the highlight cursor over the name or IP address of the  server and enter the new value     Note  the default DNS domains  previously defined through the DNS box are  displayed for information  they can not be modified      34 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    3 2   GENERAL SETTINGS    The terminal general settings are available through the  Configuration       Terminal  menu     Configuration    Network  Terminal  Sessions  Ports    Advanced     gt    gt    gt    gt      gt     Quick Set Up       Diagnostics Download    Keyboard Mouse  Screen   Audio   Global RDP ICA  Time Settings   Remote Control  Password    Miscellaneous    3 2 1   The Keyboard and the Mouse    Select the  Configuration   Terminal   Keyboard Mouse  menu to access the    following dialog box     Keyboard       English   On   orf   Medium  500 ms   Medium    No  No    Keyboard parameters  PS 2 or USB      Nationality  select the nationality from a list     NUM  Led Initialization  this led lights when the AX3000 is switched on     CAPS  Led Initialization  this led lights when the AX3000 is switched on    AX3000   User s Manual    35    Interactive Set Up AXEL      Repeat Key Delay  sets the duration of a key being held down before it  starts to auto repeat  values  no  low  medium or high       Repeat Key Speed  enabled only if the automatic repeat is set   select  the automatic repeat speed when a key is held down  values  low
130. ection is  automatically established after a disconnection  Otherwise  the user can  press   Alt     Fx   to establish    new connection     Session Label  this character string  11 characters max   is used to  identify the session within the session manger or in the status line      Enhanced Parameters  see Appendix A 10 3     6 2   USING THE AX3000  6 2 1   The 5250 Status Line  Note  the 5250 status line is different than the AX3000 TCP IP status line   The    AX3000 TCP IP status line displays information about current connected  sessions  This line can be enabled disabled through the AX3000 Set Up      150 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 400    The 5250 status line is displayed at the bottom of the screen and gives the  following information                                                                                         ystem Available Upper Shift  essage s  Waiting Caps Lock Function key Assignment  Input Inhibit   Insert  1   X t a    R 63 m LL CC  Available Keystrokes Cursor  Mode  R  Record  Locator    P  Process   Diacritic Mode    The status symbols are described in the following table                                               Symbol   Name Meaning  a System The host system is operating and available  Available    Message s  This symbol  and a beep  indicate the host system  Waiting has one or more messages for the terminal   X Input Inhibit This symbol is displayed when     the host system is processing the last input    the host sys
131. ed     axe 12COO7B  Ethernet  Default DNS Domain       a  The Terminal Name    A terminal name is mandatory     though need not be used  By default the  terminal name is set to    axel    suffixed by the last part of the MAC Ethernet  address  For example  axel200002   This ensures all terminals have a unique  default name     The same name is given to the default connection name for RDP or ICA  connections  though this can be changed     If the terminal name is to be used as a DNS name  i e  registered to a DNS  Server  an extension is required  This extension is called  DNS domain   For  example  paris axel fr      Registering an entry with the DNS server requires an FQDN   Fully Qualified  Domain Name  If the  DNS Domain  parameter is empty  the  Default DNS  Domain   supplied by the DHCP server  will be used  If  Default DNS Domain   is empty  the name won t be registered     The name registration can be performed by the DHCP server or by the terminal  itself  For more information see the next chapter and the appendix A 4 3     28 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    b  Active Interface    This parameter selects which interface to be used  Possible values are     Ethernet  a DNS domain name can be specified     None  serial mode     c  The Terminal Comment    This character string allows a terminal description to be entered  This  description will be obtained by the Axel Remote Management software             during the  discover  operation  This comment w
132. ed  is provided as a standard  feature by major operating systems  Unix Linux  NT  etc    The main  benefit of this protocol is an LPD printer can be shared by different  operating systems  But LPD restrictions are      The printer must be manually added to OS 400     The printer is accessed through an outqueue  and not a device      The printer job manipulation is not fully supported     Normally the Prt5250 protocol is preferred   No printer declaration is needed at    OS 400 level   But the LPD protocol allows the printer to be shared between  different operating systems  Choose the protocol which best fits your needs     6 3 1   Setting Up and Using a Prt5250 Printer  a  General Settings    To set the Prt5250 service  enter the AX3000 Set Up and select   Configuration   Ports   xxx   yyy      In the displayed box  set the  Associated Service  to  Prt5250   then select  Net  Service Parameters  and press  lt Space gt   The following box is displayed     no server     lt Space gt     QSYSOPR   LIBL   11   Yes    NONE   MFRTYPMDL       158 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 400    These parameters are      Server  the server to which the AX3000 opens a printer connection   press  lt space gt  to get a list of available servers     This parameter must be entered      Enhanced Parameters  access to a group of parameters  The default  values of these parameters are suitable for most of the use  See next  sub chapter      Printer Name  DEVNAME   printer device na
133. ed COM LPT port will be automatically  added to the Windows server resources  It will be removed on disconnection   Maximum two ports can be redirected     Before being redirected an RDP ICA COM Port must be declared at the     physical port  level  The available ports are  auxiliary ports  parallel  Aux1 and  Aux2  and USB logical ports     Select the dialog box of the  Connection port   menu  Configuration   Ports     xxx    For example  the Aux1 port        Line Parameters  Printer  9600  8 1 No    fissociated Service      RDP ICA Redirection                   AX3000   User s Manual 91    Installing under Windows AXEL    Set the  Active  parameter to  As COM port        As Printer and COM   Then  select  COM Port Parameters  and press  lt Space gt   The following box is  displayed               Always Low       These parameters are     Port Name  redirect COM port name  from COM1 to COM255      DSR Signal  only for Aux1 and Aux2   the DSR signal is not supported  by the AX3000 native auxiliary ports  This parameter allows the incoming  DSR value to be emulated  The possible values are   Always Low     Always Up    Follows CTS  or  Follows CD      Note  for redirecting an LPT port  set the    Active    parameter to  As LPT port  or     As Printer        LPT  The LPT port settings dialog box only offers to customize  the LPT name  LPT1 by default      The COM port declaration is completed  For the redirection procedure  consult  the next sub section     92 AX3000   User s Ma
134. ee possible values  40  80 or 132      Number of Rows  enter a value between 24 and 44     Note  for more information  please refer to Appendix A 10 5     8 1 5   Customizing the Emulation    Various emulation parameters can be modified but generally the default values  are the most suitable  Three groups of parameters control emulation settings     Additional Parameters  emulation behavior     Editing Keyboard Table  associating character strings to certain keyboard  keys     Key Mapping  associating character strings to any keyboard keys     Palette remapping emulation colors     AX3000   User s Manual 189    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    a  Emulation Additional Parameters    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  General Parameters  and press   lt Space gt   The following box is displayed     Display Keyboard  PC 437 ASCII  Yes Caps Lock  Yes No  No No  Line Enabled  Blinking  lt Space gt   Color Operating Mode  No  Yes    Auxiliary Port   1    4                 These parameters            Character Set  the available character sets depend on which emulation  is selected     Vertical Scrolling  whether the AX3000 display scrolls  when the cursor  is moved down passed the bottom of the screen     Yes  the display scrolls up    No  the cursor re appears on the first  top  line     Wrap  behavior of the AX3000 when the cursor reaches the last column  of the screen     Yes  the next characters wrap round onto the start of the next line    No  each new character overwr
135. een dump to  the default auxiliary port         lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt D gt      lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt D gt     Closes the current session        lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt K gt      lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt K gt     Changes the keyboard type   PCAS 400         lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Del gt      lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt Del gt     Shuts down the AX3000         lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt lI gt     Information about the RDP   ICA or VNC current session         lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt X gt      lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt X gt     Opens the connection box   see Chapter 9 2                  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt BackTab gt     lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt BackTab   Set    text mode    set up    gt    lt Ctrl gt  lt C gt  or  lt Rest gt  lt C gt  Selects and copies a screen   lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt C gt  zone  mouse is requested    lt Ctrl gt  lt V gt  or  lt Rest gt  lt V gt  Paste the text   lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt V gt                 Note  keystrokes written in bold can be disabled  See Chapter A 10 2  section    d      82    AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows      5   INSTALLING UNDER WINDOWS    AX3000   User s Manual 83    Installing under Windows AXEL    This chapter covers AX3000 installation under Windows    This chapter describes the operation of the AX3000 in a Windows environment   For more general information please refer to the previous chapters     The connection to a Windows server can be done either via     Microsoft s RDP prot
136. elnet session   A help line is located in the bottom of the screen     The AX3000 set up screen appears as follows     Configuration Diagnostics Download       General  op  Horizontal General Menu           Vertical Menu    Help Line       Arie   Hel   A ye E Pranctadas ey ed ee            a  The Horizontal General Menu    Move through the menu with horizontal arrow keys  A different vertical menu will  be displayed automatically as each item is traversed     b  Vertical Menus    Move through vertical menus with vertical arrow keys  Confirm the selected  command by pressing  lt CR gt      AX3000   User s Manual 249    Appendix AXEL    Note  the symbol   gt    beside a vertical menu item  indicates that it is a sub   menu  Expand the sub menu with the  lt CR gt  key  then move through it with  vertical arrow keys     c  Dialog Boxes  Move through dialog boxes with vertical arrow keys     Two types of fields are distinguished in a dialog box     Button  press  lt CR gt  to perform the associated action     Parameter  two types of value occur     A free value  numeric or character string   the data capture mode  is automatically enabled  see the next chapter       A discrete value  press  lt SPACE gt  to show the permitted values or  to display a list of values  Move through lists with vertical arrow  keys  confirm the selected value by pressing  lt CR gt   Press  lt Esc gt   to cancel     Use the  lt Tab gt  key to move directly from the parameter field to the button field   Se
137. ength  7 or 8 bits   stop  bit and parity  none  odd or even       Test Device Presence  the CTS signal can be used by the AX3000 to  detect the peripheral   s presence      DTR Initial State  select  high          low         RTS Initial State  select  high          low         Handshake for Transmission  handshake used by the peripheral to  control the AX3000 s data flow     Handshake for Reception  available only in bi directional mode    handshake used by the AX3000 to control the peripheral   s data flow      Associated Service  ldp  prt5250  tty      see Chapter 3 5 2 and  following      RDP ICA Redirection  see Chapter 5     b  Setting the Parallel Port  Select the  Configuration   Ports   Auxiliary Ports   Parallel  dialog box to  configure the parallel port    Associated Service    RDP ICA   Redirection       The dialog box parameters are     Associated Service          prt5250  tty      see Chapter 3 5 2 and below     RDP ICA Redirection  see Chapter 5        Setting USB Logical Ports    Select the  Configuration   Ports   USB Logical Ports   UsbX  dialog box to  configure a USB logical port     Note  a USB logical port can be associated with a printer or a USB RS232    AX3000   User s Manual 61    Interactive Set Up AXEL    adaptor     Example of a dialog box for a USB printer     Logical Port Usbi    Product    Associated Service    RDP ICA Redirection    ASCII TEST       Example of a dialog box for a USB RS232 adaptor     Product    Line Parameters  Printer  9609
138. erial or USB      Serial Touch Screen  USB Touch Screen     E loTouch    Space       Space   Click Only    Space   No  20 20   Line Parameters    9600 CANCEL    8 1 No       Type  serial touch screens only   select the touch screen manufacturer   ELOTouch  MicroTouch or Liyitec     Automatic Detection  serial touch screens only  press   Space   to  automatically obtain the set up parameters from the touch screen  To detect  these settings the Axel terminal scans a range of baud rates and data formats   When these match the touch screen settings the serial line parameters are    38 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    updated     Calibration  press  lt Space gt  to display a dialog box for calibration   Follow the  instructions and touch the screen where    s are displayed      Events sent  USB touch screens only   two modes are available     Click Only  a  mouse click  event is sent when the screen is touched    All  in addition of the click event   mouse motion  events are sent until the  screen is untouched     Transpose X Y Axis  USB touch screens only   select  yes  or  no      Double Touch Accuracy Range  pixels   this parameter defines a zone size  which allows double click to be emulated  A double click event will be sent  when the screen is touched twice  in a period less than 0 5 seconds  and when  the two impacts are located in the same zone  less than X pixels      Note  the touch screen functions properly only after the calibration has been  perfor
139. erman   Austria 0C07 Urdu 0420  German   Liechtenstein 1407 Uzbek   Cyrillic 0843  German   Luxembourg 1007 Uzbek   Latin 0443  German   Switzerland 0807 Vietnamese 042A  Greek 0408 Xhosa 0434  Hebrew 040D Yiddish 043D  Hindi 0439 Zulu 0435  Hungarian 040E       Note  this list can be found on the MSDN Microsoft site     http   msdn microsoft com library default asp  url  library en us script56 html 882ca1eb   81b6 4a73 839d 154c6440bf70 asp    A 10 5     Displaying Text Session in Graphics Mode  Previously Axel used the legacy method to display text sessions  telnet  5250     3270     based on columns and rows  80x25  132x25    and a specific  resolution     308 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    We are changing the way we display text because     Many new TFT monitors no longer support the specific resolution  required  720x400    or if they do the characters are blurry and jittery     Many monitors have a slight delay when changing session of different  resolutions  Using graphics resolutions lets Windows and telnet sessions  use the same resolution      Most new monitors are widescreen  and the legacy characters  designed  for aspect ratio 4 3 can be distorted when  stretched  on a wide screen  monitor    The solution is to use graphics resolutions for text displays  This addresses the  first two points above  the character issue is covered below     The challenge is fitting characters designed for aspect ratio of 4 3 onto a 16 9  screen without creating distortio
140. erminal Services   CJ Client Server data red  H E Encryption and Securit   28 Licensing  E Temporary folders     Session Directory   8 Sessions  E Windows Installer      Windows Messenger        Windows Media Digital Rigt     Windows Media Player    Windows Update  E System  H E Network  Printers  B rd User Configuration  E Software Settings    L Terminal Services    Enforce Removal of Remote  Desktop Wallpaper    Display Properties    Requirements   At least Microsoft Windows XP  Terminal Services    Description    Specifies whether desktop wallpaper  is displayed to remote clients  connecting via Terminal Services     You can use this setting to enforce  the removal of wallpaper during a  remote session  By default  Windows  XP Professional displays wallpaper to  remote clients connecting through  Remote Desktop  depending on the  client configuration  see the  Experience tab in the Remote  Desktop Connection options for more  information   Servers running  Windows Server 2003 do not display  wallpaper by default to remote  sessions     If the status is set to Enabled   wallpaper never appears to a  Terminal Services client     Setting State    E Client Server data redirection     Beneryption and Security  Licensing   Temporary folders  Session Directory  Cisessions  4 Keep Alive Connections  Automatic reconnection  Restrict Terminal Services users to a single remote session    Deny log off of an administrator logged in to the console session  Limit number of connections  E
141. erver      Local  when the key sequence is pressed  the  Associated String  is  interpreted by the terminal  as if the string had been sent by the  server      d  Palette  This allows default emulation colors to be remapped to any color     Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Palette  and press   Space    The  following box is displayed     Color for Black       Select one of the 16 emulation colors and press   Space   to select another    AX3000   User s Manual 195    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    color     8 1 6   Coloring Mode    A background color  plus a foreground color for each monochrome character  attribute or graphics character  may be set through the Coloring Mode  This  function allows monochrome applications to be displayed in color     The  Coloring Mode  parameter offers 2 values      Standard  6 coloring attributes     Enhanced  16 coloring attributes  To customize the coloring mode  select the  Coloring Mode Settings   parameter and press  lt Space gt   The dialog box depends on which coloring  mode is chosen     a  Standard Coloring Mode    The dialog box for the standard coloring mode is     No attribute White Blue  Bright uhite  Cyan       The available coloring attributes are normal  reverse video  underline  semi   graphics and blink  optional      196 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    To set a coloring attribute  select and press   CR    The following dialog box  appears     Criteria Settings    String example  Wh
142. erver  Firmware update  Config update  Reboot       After having received the firmware the terminal reboots automatically and re   runs stages 1  2 and 3 before passing on to stage 5     2 2 5   Stage 5  Receiving the configuration file    This is the dialog box shown when receiving the configuration file     AUTO CONFIGURATION    Network detection  IP Address   DHCP Server   AxRM Server    Firmware update    Config update  Reboot       22 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Initial Power On    Note  if the firmware is updated the new version is displayed  After the  configuration file is received the terminal reboots     AUTO CONFIGURATION    Network detection  IP Address   DHCP Server   AxRM Server    Firmware update    Config update  Reboot       The terminal is now ready for use     AX3000   User s Manual 23    AXEL Interactive Set Up    mm  INTERACTIVE SET UP    AX3000   User s Manual 25    Interactive Set Up AXEL    This chapter describes AX3000 installation using the interactive set up  procedure     The following can be used to enter the AX3000 interactive set up     Using  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Esc gt  from the terminal    Using Remote Control from AxRM   See Chapters 10 1 and 10 2     Using Telnet from another terminal PC   See Chapter 10 3     Note  the set up can be password protected  in which case the password must  be entered to access the quick set up dialog box  For more information  see  Chapter 3 2 7     Note  the following keystrokes are available in the se
143. file without any human    18 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Initial Power On    intervention  There are also options to specify various terminal specific  parameters  for example an IP address and terminal name etc     Note  the auto configuration mechanism requires minimum version 2 0 2 of  AxRM  available free from www axel com      For more information on AxRM   s activity in the auto configuration process  see  the manual  Axel Remote Management   Version 2   available from  www axel com     The auto configuration process      s automatically initiated when power is applied to a brand new terminal  or if the terminal is reset to factory defaults   see A 10 1 appendix     may be started at each boot time  For more information see Chapter  3 7 2     The stages are     Checking the network  link     DHCP request sent to obtain an IP address and other parameters   optional      Terminal contacts the AxRM server     Firmware file sent  if required   followed by a reboot     Configuration file sent  followed by a reboot   Total process takes less than two minutes    2 2 1   Stage 1  Checking the Network    When the terminal is powered up the network connection is tested  The terminal  displays    Checking Network Link     If a network connection is detected  a  message   Auto Conf  is shown  The terminal passes to stage 2           Auto conf        2 2 2   Stage 2  Sending DHCP requests    To obtain an IP address  and possibly of other parameters  a DHCP request is  sent  If a 
144. gt   lt Enter gt   Euro symbol   Alt     E     Alt Gr gt  lt E gt   Execute macro   Exec     Alt Gr     F5     F1   F12  lt F1 gt     lt F12 gt   lt F1 gt     lt F12 gt    F13   F24  lt F13 gt     lt F24 gt   lt Shift gt  lt F1 gt     lt Shift gt  lt F12 gt   Fast left   Shift            Shift             Fast right   Shift     5     Shift   5     Field     Field   gt   lt   gt   numpad    Field     Field   gt   lt   gt   numpad    Field Exit   Field Exit    lt Entr gt   numpad    Help   Help     Alt Gr gt  lt F1 gt    Hexa   Alt     Help     Alt Gr     F7     Home of field   Alt     Rule     Home     New Line  lt  gt   lt Ctrl Right gt    Print  local mode in PC850     lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt Print gt    Ctrl     Alt     Prt Scr     Print  Print HOST mode    Print     Prt Scr     Record Macro   Record     Alt Gr gt  lt F4 gt    Reset   Rest     Ctrl Left     Roll Down  lt Shift gt  lt   gt    Page Up gt  or  lt Shift gt  lt   gt   Roll Up  lt Shift gt  lt t gt    Page Down gt  or  lt Shift gt  lt t gt   Rule  see Chapter 6 1 3   lt Rule gt   lt Alt Gr gt  lt F12 gt    System Request  lt Shift gt  lt Attn gt   lt Shift gt  lt Esc gt  or  lt Alt Gr gt  lt Prt Scr gt   Tabulation       lt Tab gt    152 AX3000   User s Manual       AXEL Installing under OS 400    Axel Functions                                   Axel Function 5250 Keyboard PC AT Keyboard  AX3000 Shutdown  lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt Del gt   lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Del gt   AX3000 Set Up  lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt 
145. haracter string  20 char max                                                                 s  vnc doublescreen   n                                                             S  S  c  Y  c  c  character      c  c  d   c  Y    s  rdp mouseaccel no es   no     280 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    s  rdp cachebitmap yes  s  rdp compression yes    s  rdp prnredir all   s  rdp prndef no   s  rdp comredir all   s  rdp usbdriveredir    s  rdp scardredir    s  rdp scardauto    s  rdp soundredir yes   s  rdp soundquality high  s  rdp msesensitivity medium  s  rdp msereport    s  rdp bckg    s  rdp wincontent    s  rdp animation    s  rdp theme    st dsk nbsession    s  dsklabel applic    s  dsklabel close    s  ica target       ica                  ica  published     ica protobr   _ica_portbr     _ica_brtrace no  _ica_braltip no  _ica_username                    oe            oe oe oe    1       jr  i    ica masterbr   i  i  i  1     ica autologon no    ica enpassword     o     _ica_password        u    _ica_domain   _ica_autorun no  _ica_progname   _ica_pathname   _ica_encryption     nn ouo                      DH HH HW NHN DN    JP      oe      oe oe    _ica_connectionname     AX3000   User s Manual        yes   no     yes   no   screen    screentprinter     none   all   xxx     no             n   all              yes no     yes no     yes no     yes no     low medium   high     low medium   high   maximal    all click     disabled  enabled     disabled  enabled     disa
146. he AX3000  New telnet connections will repeatedly be  opened      Under OS 400  it is impossible to exit the login stage  because there is no  way to close the current telnet session     To allow graceful shutdown  an AX3000 shutdown function is available  Press   lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Del gt      A dialog box allows the next step to be selected      SHUTDOWN  button     REBOOT  button    After selection  all active connections  screen and auxiliary port  are closed     For the  Shutdown  choice  a few seconds later  the user is informed that the  AX3000 may be turned off     AX3000   User s Manual 81    Using the AX3000 AXEL    4 6   AX3000 HOT KEYS    The AX3000 hot keys are listed in the following table   These hot keys are  locally processed by the AX3000 and independent of emulation         PC Keyboard    5250 Keyboard    Action                          lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Esc gt   lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt Esc gt  Enters the AX3000 Set Up    Alt     Fx     Alt     Fx   Switches session  these hot   key can be modified    lt Alt gt  lt   gt   lt Alt gt  lt   gt  Switches to next session   lt Alt gt  lt   gt   lt Alt gt  lt   gt  Switches to previous  session   lt Cirl gt  lt Alt gt  lt S gt   lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt S gt  Locks the screen    lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Pause gt   lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt Pause gt  Sends a break code   Note         for telnet  protocol          Ctrl     Alt     Prt Scr       lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt Prt Scr      Performs a scr
147. her enabled or disabled     8 1 7   Underline Attribute Management   The reverse video attribute  the bold attribute and the blinking attribute are  supported by all VGA monitors  However  the underline attribute is only  supported by monochrome VGA monitors    If the underline attribute is essential with a color VGA monitor  one of the  following three methods can be used  but note that each entails the loss of  some other display capability    a  Using the Session as a Monochrome Session   Set the Attribute Mode parameter to monochrome  see Chapter 8 1 5     b  Using the Coloring Mode   The AX3000 coloring mode is used to provide different foreground and  background colors for each monochrome attribute  So although no underline    appears on the screen  normal and underlined text can be distinguished by  different background colors     AX3000   User s Manual 199    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    The benefit of this method is that the coloring mode is specific to a single  session  Sessions with different colors  or with the native colors of a software  package  can be run on the same AX3000    For more information about  coloring mode   see Chapter 8 1 6     c  Using Underline Attribute in Color Mode    An AX3000 set up parameter allows the underline attribute to be displayed in  color mode  but this disables the bold attribute     This is a good way to display underlining if the bold attribute is not used by the  software in question     Enter the AX3000 set up and se
148. host configuration           ERR 213  too many sessions or pages  Page number set to 1     Command  setup_send   Cause  eight screens are supported by the AX3000  This resource is  shared by sessions and pages  i e  multi_nbsession    multi_nbpage  lt  max  session     Consequence  to get a consistent configuration  the multi_nbpage  parameter is set to one     244 3000   Users Manual    AXEL Remote Administration    Solution  check the number of sessions and pages        ERR 214  Associate host not found  Association reset     Command  setup_send   Cause  a session is associated with a non existing host    Consequence  to get a consistent configuration  this session is not  associated with a host    Solution  check the host configuration        ERR 215  s  udk xxx and following  no place to store udk value     Command  setup send  Cause  not enough memory to store a group of programmable keys   Consequence  the default values of these keys are restored     ERR 218  Telnet service and default port conflict           Command  setup send   Cause  the telnet set up TCP port is in conflict with another service   Consequence  the telnet set up doesn t work properly    Solution  the conflict must be fixed     ERR 219  ASCIItoEBCDIC  only on default port           Command  setup send   Cause  The ASCII to EBCDIC operating mode is not associate with  the default port    Consequence  the auxiliary port doesn t work properly    Solution  change the default auxiliary port        ERR 221
149. ic Logon    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Auto Logon  and press  lt Space gt   The  following box is displayed        These parameters are      Username  this is the default value for the username field of the Login  screen      Automatic Logon  set this parameter to  Yes  to get an automatic logon      Password  available only if  Automatic Logon  is set to  Yes    press   lt Space gt  to enter the password      Domain  this is the default value for the Windows domain field of the  Login screen      Note  for a VMWARE VDM configuration  this domain field is not  available     AX3000   User s Manual 119    Installing under Windows AXEL    5 4 5   Using the  Virtual Desktop  Session    a  Authentication    On establishing the  Virtual Desktop  session  authentication is requested    Username  password and domain   A local dialog box requests this information  as below     PARIS             PARIS       Note  with a VMWARE VDM connection broker the domain name is selected  though a list   With Citrix Xen Desktop  the domain name is manually entered     b  Virtual Desktop List    After the authentication is passed  the virtual desktop list is displayed     XP DHCP       After the virtual desktop is selected by the user  the terminal requests  connection information to the connection broker     After few seconds  the target virtual machine desktop should be displayed     5 4 6   Confiquring the VDM Connection Broker    To use an Axel terminal the VDM connection broker 
150. ierarchy   using the following notation    item1   item2   action     For example  to perform the above action  select item1 in the main menu  then  select item2 in the sub menu     A 1 5   Exiting the set up    To exit the set up  select  Configuration   Quit      If changes have been made while in the set up  a dialog box appears    Select  YES  to save the modifications and exit the set up  The new  AX3000 settings will then be stored in NVRAM  non volatile memory      Select  NO  to abandon your changes and exit the set up        AX3000   User s Manual 251    Appendix AXEL    A 2   NETWORK OVERVIEW  A 2 1   Ethernet Addresses    AX3000 terminals  like other devices equipped for Ethernet networking  have a  unique hardware address which is issued by the manufacturer and cannot be  modified  This address is in the form of six hexadecimal bytes  separated by  colons     AX3000 Ethernet address format   00   0 34                   Select           command      the horizontal menu of the AX3000 set up to see the  AX3000 Ethernet address     A 2 2   IP Address   Every device connected to an Ethernet network must have a single 32 bit  address which encodes both the network and the host ID  Internet addresses   sometimes called   IP addresses    are usually written as four decimal numbers    separated by decimal points      character      There are three main classes of IP address     7 bits 24 bits  ClassA  01 Network               Host             14 bits 16 bits  ClasB   1 O  
151. ified  resource  screen or auxiliary port    Example  addressing scales  in conjunction with the ASCII to EBCDIC  function      A printer session  see Chapter 6 3 1   data is output to this session port     AX3000   User s Manual 155    Installing under OS 400 AXEL    a  Start and Stop Sequence  Enable the transparent mode and select the start and stop sequence  default    value          b  Operating Mode Rules  The transparent mode is driven by the following rules     e For a screen session  enable the transparent mode by sending the  transparent sequence       followed by the port number   0  default port   1 to 3  native auxiliary ports  Aux1  Aux2 and parallel   4 to 5  network printer  Net1 and Net2    6 to 9  USB logical ports  Usb1  Usb2  Usb3 and Usb4      e For    printer session  send only the transparent sequence to enable the  transparent mode     e In both case  the transparent mode is disabled when the transparent  sequence is sent a second time     e The character remapping is based on PC850 ASCII table  as with the  ASCII to EBCDIC function      c  Character or Hexadecimal Mode    The two transparent modes are      Character Mode  the dataflow can contain both ASCII characters and  hexadecimal ASCII code  The hexadecimal code must began by a           the ASCII code is encoded by two digit  between 0 and F    Example  Esc AB   RC    is  1BAB 0D     Hexadecimal Mode  the dataflow contains only hexadecimal codes   encoded by two digits    Example  Esc AB   RC   
152. ill allow the terminal to be easily  located within the database     3 1 2   Ethernet Interface    To set the Ethernet interface properties select the  Configuration   Network     Ethernet Interface   IP Parameters  menu  The dialog box below is  displayed   Ethernet Interface 00 80 34 2C 00 7B  Interface  Auto Sense  No    192 168 1 24   255 255 255 0    Routers     lt Space gt     CANCEL       Note  the Ethernet address is displayed as the title box    AX3000   User s Manual 29    Interactive Set Up AXEL    The  Link  parameter is set by default as auto sense  Available modes are     Auto sense     10BT HalfDuplex     10BT FullDuplex     100BT HalfDuplex     100BT FullDuplex     The next sub chapters deal with     The interface setting  static or dynamic IP address     The DNS protocol     The router management     a  Static or Dynamic IP Address    The DHCP protocol allows the terminal   s IP address  and other parameters  to  be obtained at the boot time     When  Enable DHCP  is set to  Yes   the IP Address  field is not available and  the DHCP settings are set through the  DHCP Parameters  option  Press    Space   to display the dialog box     DHCP Option List    Other Parameters       The DHCP Option List allows certain parameters to be automatically assigned  by DHCP     30 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    Other parameters are      Lease Time  minutes   lease time value requested by the AX3000 from  the DHCP server  Depending on the DHCP server set
153. illed by the server     This can be done with the    keepalive    process  manually killing or rebooting     In some situations it may be beneficial to have always the same TCP port for an  AX3000 resource  to avoid phantom sessions or to identify connections   This is  the fixed port assignment  With this method the AX3000 resources are always      session 1   1024       session 8   1031      aux1 port   1032  aux2 port   1033  parallel port 1034      net1   1035  net2   1036      usb1   1037       usb4   1040    f  The  Nagle s Algorithm  Parameter    The Nagle s Algorithm controls behavior of the output network dataflow of a  TCP IP device  This algorithm allows the number of datagrams sent by the  AX3000 to decrease  However a certain latency may be noticeable due to the  caching of data before transmission     This algorithm is disabled to prioritize performance  However some operating  systems require this function to be enabled       The  Keepalive  Parameter    The keepalive is a mechanism that allows the AX3000 to regularly check its  TCP IP connection status     In event of network incident  the AX3000 is able to detect this incident and to  close the related TCP IP connections  This mechanism is also useful when DSL  connections are used  the AX3000 IP address is reset on time per day      By default the keepalive function is disabled     The keepalive function is set in minutes    Note  with ISDN routers  which automatically drop the phone line  this regular  data
154. in  as400 terminals axel com   Then  in event of  failure  the resolution is made with the name itself  as400      260 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix      linux  an IP address is associated  No DNS resolution      www axel com  this is a full name  The resolution is first made with the  name itself  www axel com   Then  in event of failure  the resolution is  made with the first DNS domain  www axel com servers axel com   Then   in event of failure  with the second DNS domain   www axel com terminals axel com      b  Resolution Method  To resolve a name  the AX3000 sends DNS requests to the DNS server s      If    DNS server sends back a positive response  then the IP address is found  and the resolution operation is completed  If not two cases of failure are  possible     Receiving a negative response  the name is not known by this DNS  server  The AX3000 will retry with a new DNS request or with the second  DNS server     No response  time out   after a few seconds the DNS server has not  sent back a response  The AX3000 resends the same request to the  DNS server   Note  after 4 time out errors on the same DNS server  this server is   removed  from the resolution operation     Note  if a response previously considered as a time out error is received  this  response is treated as a valid response  positive or negative      The AX3000 requests a recursive search to the DNS servers  and not iterative  search   This means that the DNS server must search itself for a D
155. in the  DHCP Option List   this field  cannot be accessed     However additional routers can also be declared  to reach specific destination  servers or networks  Select  Other Routers  and press  lt Space gt   The following  dialog box is displayed     Gateway IP addr Target IP addr Target Type Netmask       Any such router must be identified with 3 parameters     The router   s IP address     The target IP address  destination      The target type  server or network  in this last case  a netmask allows  sub netting     3 1 3   Server Management    A server is a TCP IP machine  UNIX  AS 400  etc  to which the AX3000 can  open connections  RDP  ICA  telnet  tty  etc       AX3000   User s Manual 33    Interactive Set Up AXEL    To configure the server table  select the  Configuration   Network   Servers   menu  A dialog box as shown below is displayed     Server Name IP Address   DNS    linux 192 168 1 190   windows server axel com    DNS Search Domains  paris axel fr  DHCP        The server definition depends on whether DNS is enabled    No DNS  a server is identified by both an alphanumeric character string  beginning with a letter AND an IP address     With DNS  a server is defined only by its name  This name can be either  a full name  www axel com  or an incomplete name  as400   Its IP  address is resolved later   See Appendix A 4     Add a Server  move the highlight cursor to a vacant line and enter the name  and either its IP address or DNS name     Delete a Server  sel
156. in the status line      Login Script  a  login script  can be set to automatically enter user  names and passwords at the login prompt  See Chapter 8 1 9      Enhanced parameters  see Appendix A 10 3     8 1 9   Login Script    The  login script  can be set to automatically enter user names and passwords    at the login prompt     a  Enabling a Login Script    To associate a login script with a session  within the  Session Profile  box select    AX3000   User s Manual    201    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL     Connection Properties  and press  lt Space gt   In the displayed box  see Chapter  8 1 8  select  Login Script      The login script is a character string with the following characteristics      Maximum 60 characters      The string is composed of tokens  The NULL character  encoded by  00   is used as a token separator  A string must contain an even number of  tokens      Any character except a NULL can compose a token      A string can contain as many tokens as needed      Odd tokens are characters expected by the AX3000      Even tokens are characters sent by the AX3000 after the expected token  has been received     A login script looks like   aaaaaa O00bbbbbb 00cccccc 00ddddddd    b  Example    With the following script   login   00root 0D 00password   00mypwd  0D    When the session is opened   lt Alt gt  lt Fx gt    the AX3000 acts as      Waiting for  login       After  login  has been received  the AX3000 sends  root   lt CR gt    Note  as for the programma
157. ing  64 char max    IP address format     tcp ping setip yes yes   no   tcp tnsetup port 4096 number   tcp remoteCtrl port 4097 number     tcp remoteCtrl enpassword  character string  15 char max      tcp remoteCtrl password                  tcp remoteCtrl allowed no  yes   no          character string  5 char max                     tcp remoteCtrl see no no   colors   overscan    statline   tcp network discover no  yes   no     Auxiliary Ports and Logical Ports Parameters  a  AUX1 and AUX2 Ports    In the following section of the file  for ease of reading the auxiliary port number   1 or 2  has been represented by the     character  In a real configuration file   the parameters for each auxiliary port would  of course  be listed     aux  service none  none   rtty   printd   lpd  rcmd   rtelnet   tty   Prt5250  Prt3270     aux  service name auxi character string  8 char max      aux  associate host vangogh character string  64 char max      aux  service tcpport 23 number     aux  associate term ansi    character string  8 char max                              aux  associate autoconn yes  yes   no   aux  associate reconn yes  yes   no   aux  rtty accept no  yes   no   aux  filter nl no  yes   no   aux  preprint string   character string  48 char max    aux  postprint string   character string  48 char max    aux  associate devname PRN  character string  10 char max    aux  associate msgqgname QSYSOPR  character string  10 char max    aux  associate msgqglib  LIBL  character st
158. ing the tftp protocol  the firmware file location  filename  and tftp host IP address  must be given     a  Remote Administration   The remote administration command depends on the operating system  Refer  to the Chapter 6 4  OS 400   the Chapter 7 3  OS 390  or the Chapter 8 5   Unix Linux     Example for Unix Linux       rsh ax3001 ax download password  usr firm 192 168 1 249    The message  Download in progress     is displayed on the operator s console if  the download runs correctly     Possible errors  displayed on the operator s console     ERR 105  invalid rcmd command  incorrect keyword  check the  syntax and spelling         292 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    RR 108  invalid number of parameters  bad parameter   umber  2 or 3 parameters are required after the keyword     RR 109  invalid file length  the filename is too long  more   an 31 characters     ERR 110  invalid server  the tftp host name is unknown  not listed   n the AX3000 set up      ERR 111  invalid router  the router name is unknown  not listed in  the AX3000 set up      SHS                   Note  other error messages may also be displayed  connection timed out  for  example   Refer to the UNIX system manuals for explanations     For more information about the download process  see Chapter A 9 4   b  Downloading Through Set Up    Enter AX3000 Set Up   lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Esc gt   and select the  Download  menu   The following dialog box is displayed        Enter the following paramete
159. inter via  dev ttyp4  which may be  preferable over using LPD in certain circumstances  Similarly the Axel terminal  can be accessed via a predetermined and fixed  dev ttyp  which in certain cases  may be preferable over using telnet     The AXEL tty server is a UNIX daemon  axttyd   The axttyd daemon must be  used with the AX3000 tty or rtty network service     The AXEL tty server creates a    pipe    between pseudo devices on the UNIX host    dev ttypx  and AX3000 resources  sessions and or auxiliary ports   This    pipe     lets Unix treat the Axel sessions and auxiliary ports as local resources     Note about pseudo terminals  a pseudo terminal is composed of two parts  a  master file and a slave file  UNIX supports two possible styles for naming pttys     One master and X slaves  AT amp T style   the master filename is  dev ptmx  and the slave filenames are  dev pts xxx  where        is a number     X masters and X slaves  Berkeley style   the master filename is   dev ptypxxx and the slave filenames are  dev ttypxxx  where xxx is the  same number for master and slave      AX3000   User s Manual 217    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    The following drawing shows the Unix Linux mechanisms     UNIX  AXEL              E Server    Software 4 Software     Software     3 P     m t  ypx X ptypx                  X ptypy     ttypz X ptypz      Socket            slave   master   slave   master   slave   master        TCP Stack         AX3000 TCP IP Terminal                   8 4
160. ions  SESS1  SESS2       Auxiliary ports  AUX1  AUX2  PARALLEL  NETx and USBx     Use the following command to reset a resource            gt  RUNRMTCMD CMD  AX_SINIT password RESS   RMTLOCNAME   192 1 1 241   IP     Where     AX_REBOOT   Command for AX3000 resource reset     password   Specify the set up password if set    192 1 1 241  AX3000 IP address    RESS   Resource name  ex  SESS1      c  Editing the AX3000 Settings    The whole AX3000 set up can be obtained by invoking the following command         gt  RUNRMTCMD CMD  SETUP GET  RMTLOCNAME  192 168 1 241   IP     or a partial set up can also be obtained  only used set up parameters are sent             gt  RUNRMTCMD CMD SETUP GET LITE  RMTLOCNAME  192 168 1 241   IP     Where     SETUP GET   Command for getting the whole set up     SETUP GET LITE   Command for getting the partial set up     192 168 1 241   AX3000 IP address     For more information about these commands  refer to Chapter 10   d  Setting Up the AX3000    No OS 400 command allows the contents of a set up file to be sent over the  network  The following example describes the use of rsh Windows command          gt  rsh 192 168 1 241 setup send password     tmp axel    Where     192 168 1 241   AX3000 IP address    setup send   Command for set up the AX3000     password   Specify the set up password if set     164 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 400    For more information about this command  refer to Chapter 10     e  Downloading a Firmw
161. irection    The terminal negotiates its own local time zone  This allows different             times  to be displayed on terminals in different geographic regions     AX3000   User s Manual 43    Interactive Set Up AXEL    Note  the time zone redirection function must be enabled on the Windows 2003  server  See Chapter 5 5 6     The time zone parameters are     Time Zone GMT  positive or negative offset from GMT     Time Zone Name  a non empty character string  Greenwich by default      Daylight Saving  enabling daylight saving function     Daylight Settings  press  lt Space gt  to customize daylight settings  The  following dialog box is displayed     Transition to Daylight Time  Last Sunday March    Transition to Standard Time  Last Sunday October  3       Enter the following parameters for each transition time     Transition Day  day number  day and month   For example  Last  Sunday of March for daylight time      Transition Hour  enter the hour without minute   For example  2 is  02 00      c  Automatic Reboot    When a NTP server is set  the terminal can be automatically rebooted  every  day or a specific day   This can be used with the auto configuration feature                     AX3000  User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    3 2 6   Terminal Remote Control    To set up the remote control function  select the menu  Configuration     Terminal   Remote Control   The following dialog box is displayed     Remote Control  Yes  Yes   lt Space gt   4098  5900  Telnet Se
162. is 1B41420D    d  Examples    With the following examples the start and stop sequence is        156 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 400    Example 1  Screen session  character mode    When this EBCDIC data is received      1 1       2       44 6C 44 F161 F1 C2 81      61 F2 C6 44 6C 44     This ASCII data is sent to the AUX1 port    lt ESC gt at   1B 61 74 2F        Example 2  Printer Session  character mode    When this EBCDIC data is received       1       2       44 6C 44 F161 F1 C2 81 A361 F2 C6 44 6C 44     This ASCII data is sent to the auxiliary port of this printer session    lt ESC gt at   1B 61 74 2F     e  Handling DTR and RTS Signals    The transparent mode can also be used to control  from a screen session  DTR  and RTS output signals     The command syntax is the following    DTR Port Action   RTS Port Action    Where     Port  port numbers are listed in sub section b  Action  signal is low if this value is 0  Else signal is high     6 3   5250 PRINTER    Auxiliary ports  USB logical ports and network printer ports are provided by the  AX3000  These ports are independently controlled so multiple printers can be  attached to the AX3000     AX3000   User s Manual 157    Installing under OS 400 AXEL    These printers can be controlled by one of two protocols      Prt5250  this service  RFC 2877  is OS 400 oriented  A printer controlled  by this service is seen as a standard spooled system printer device      LPD  this service  RFCs 1048 and relat
163. is information  as below        These authentication parameters are sent to the Citrix servers which permit or  deny the user access  The user name  and password  can be entered in the  terminals setup to remove the need to re enter on every login  See Logon  Authentication above    On successful authorization the application list and characteristics  name     icons     is sent to the terminal  The desktop is created locally using this  information     AX3000   User s Manual 113    Installing under Windows AXEL    b  Using the Desktop    After authentication the user is given a standard graphical interface for  launching applications        AXEL        APPLICATIONS aa 9       Accessories Word Excel Photodraw                         Notes     The screen is slightly different for different screen resolutions  1280x1024     the screen displayed is as above  1024x768     the upper banner is not displayed  800x600     neither upper nor lower banner are displayed    The  Refresh  icon  top right corner  refreshes the desktop    The    Folder    icon is a standard Citrix offering and can be used to contain  and organize application icons  Sub folders are supported    The    House    icon  top right  returns the user directly to the root folder     When the user clicks on an application icon the terminal uses the first free    reserved session to launch an ICA connection  If all the reserved sessions are  already in use the terminal will beep     114 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL In
164. ite Blue    Foreground Colour       Note  the blink and underline parameters are disabled in standard coloring  mode     b  Enhanced Coloring Mode    This mode enables background color  foreground color and the display of the  underline and blink to be set for all attributes     Example  the multiple attribute Blink Reverse can be displayed with red  foreground  green background  no blinking and underline enabled     AX3000   User s Manual 197    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    The dialog box for enhanced coloring mode is     Enhanced Coloring Mode  Yes   No  Normal Blink    Bright white    Cyan    Bright white Cyan    Light cyan Blue    Bright white Blue  Bright white Blue    CANCEL       Coloring mode parameters      Blink allowed  if this parameter is set to  no   16 background colors are  available  Otherwise  only 8 background colors are allowed      Underline allowed  if this parameter  which requires enhanced mode  is  set to  yes   the underline attribute can be displayed but only 8 foreground  colors are available  Otherwise  there is no underline attribute but 16  foreground colors     198 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    To set a coloring attribute  select and press  lt CR gt   The following dialog box  appears     String example  White Blue     reground Colour       Depending on the Blink allowed and Underline allowed parameters  8 or 16  foreground and background colors are available and the Blink and Underline  parameters are eit
165. ites the last character on the line     CR CR LF  AX3000 behavior when OxODh is received     Yes  OxOD is mapped to OxOD and 0x0A    No  no specific processing is done    Cursor Shape  Line  Half Block and Block     Cursor Style  Blinking or Steady     Attributes Mode  VGA monitor mode  The two values are  color  and   monochrome   which allows underline attribute to be displayed      190 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX      Enhanced Mode  enable or disable the display of double size characters  or color underline attribute      Blink Allowed  if blink attribute is disabled  16 background colors can be  used  instead of the 8 normally available       Ignore Blank Atb  WYSE emulation only   if  yes   the blank attribute is  not processed  example  normal blank normal       End Sequence  to stop transparent printing mode     Coding  two keyboard modes are available  ASCII and scancode       CAPS Key Mode  set the CAPS LOCK to behave in either of three ways      Caps Lock  each alphabetical key sends the corresponding upper  case letter  To unlock this mode press the  lt CAPS gt  key      Shift Lock  each key send the same character sent by pressing   lt Shift gt  lt This key gt   To unlock this mode press a  lt Shift gt  key      Uppercase  each key send the upper character if it is present   Otherwise  this is the lower character  upper case letter if possible   which is sent   lt Shift gt  key acts in the standard way  whatever the  CAPS key   To un
166. label expected        Command  setup_send   Cause  the AXEL header label  BEGIN_AX_SETUP  is not the first  line of the configuration file    Consequence  the AX3000 set up is not modified    Solution  check the file  Replace it with a correct configuration file              ERR 102  bad header label protocol version     Command  setup_send   Cause  the protocol version  included in the header label  cannot be  processed by the current AX3000 firmware    Consequence  the AX3000 set up is not modified    Solution  use a configuration file with a compatible protocol     AX3000   User s Manual 241    Remote Administration AXEL       ERR 103  trailer label not found  Default factory set up reloaded    Command  setup_send   Cause  the trailer label  END_AX_SETUP  is not found   Either this  label is not included in the configuration file or the  connection failed     Consequence  the default factory set up is reloaded  to replace the  inconsistent configuration caused by the missing trailer  label     Solution  add this label to the end of file and run the command again              ERR 104  Can not get complete set up  rcmd command aborted      Command  setup get   Cause  a network problem has occurred or the command has been  killed or aborted    Consequence  the set up obtained by the command is invalid  the trailer  label is missing     Solution  run the command again        ERR 105  invalid rcmd command     Command        Cause  the keyword is unknown    Consequence  no effec
167. lay update is first built in  memory and then displayed  The global performance is the same  whatever the method  But the terminal is more comfortable to be used  when the  Cache Hextile  is enabled      Shared Session  this allows multiple VNC terminals to share the same  graphical display  i e  the same server frame buffer       Keyboard and Mouse Ignored  if  yes  all parameters related to mouse  and keyboard are disabled  The terminal no longer sends  mouse keyboard event to the VNC server     208 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX        Ctrl     Alt     Del    there are two modes for this keystroke      Local  the keystroke is handled by the AX3000 and is used to  shutdown the terminal  see Chapter 4 5      Remote  the keystroke is handled by the VNC server      CAPS Key Mode  set the CAPS LOCK to behave in either of three ways      Caps Lock  each alphabetical key sends the corresponding upper  case letter  To unlock this mode press the   CAPS   key      Shift Lock  each key send the same character sent by pressing    Shift     This key    To unlock this mode press a   Shift   key      Uppercase  each key send the upper character if it is present   Otherwise  this is the lower character  upper case letter if possible   which is sent    Shift  key acts      the standard way  whatever the  CAPS key   To unlock this mode press the   CAPS   key      Caps Lock    same as  Shift Lock   But in addition ALL the keys  supported  including  lt Esc gt   fu
168. le  box  select  Connection Properties  and press   lt Space gt   The following box is displayed     No  No    T Citrix   lt Space gt        These parameters are      Auto Connection  if this parameter is set to  yes   the connection will be  automatically established when the AX3000 is powered  Otherwise  the  user can press  lt Alt gt  lt Fx gt  to establish the connection      Auto Reconnection  if this parameter is set to  yes   a new connection is  automatically established after a disconnection  Otherwise  the user can  press   Alt     Fx   to establish a new connection      Session Label  this character string  11 characters max   is used to  identify the session within the session manger or in the status line      Enhanced parameters  see Appendix A 10 3     5 3   CITRIX  PUBLISHED APP  DESKTOP  SESSION     Note this is a unrelated to  connecting to a Citrix desktop as a published  application      The Citrix Published App  Desktop session is comparable in functionality to the  Citrix product Nfuse  WEB Interface or Program Neighborhood     5 3 1   General Configuration of the Published App  Desktop session    The terminal supports a maximum of 6 sessions  When  Published App   Desktop  is used one session is taken by the desktop itself  After the user has  been authenticated by the Citrix Server  the Citrix Server sends user specific  data through this session to configure the user s individual desktop  i e     108 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Wind
169. lect the  OK  button to save modifications and exit the dialog box  Select the   CANCEL  button or press  lt Esc gt  to exit the dialog box without saving  modifications     A 1 3   Enter Data    When a  free value  parameter field is selected  a value must be entered  it  cannot be selected from a list      Note  to indicate free value    mode  the cursor blinks at the beginning of the  field     250 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    During this mode the following keys are enabled        CR    confirmation      lt Esc gt   abandon your changes       horizontal arrows   move the cursor within the character string       Home   and   End    move the cursor directly to the beginning or the   end of the string       Del    delete the character at the cursor position      lt Backspace gt   delete the character before the cursor position       Inserts  one of two editing modes     Insertion  default   the cursor takes the form of a blinking line or    Overwrite  the cursor takes the form of a blinking block     To enter characters with an ASCII code lower than 20 hexadecimal  use a  backslash  V  before the hexadecimal value  For instance  the  Esc Z  sequence  can be encoded by MBZ      Note  when the character string is longer than the length of the field  two  indicators are displayed at the left and at the right of the field     A 1 4   Special Notation    The set up is a sequence of menus and sub menus  Define an action by the  path followed through the set up tree  h
170. lete existing  password      Retype password  re enter the identical password     b  Entering Set Up    If the set up is password protected  the following dialog box will be displayed  the next time access is attempted        46 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    Three operations are permitted     enter the password to access the set up    press  lt Esc gt  or select the  CANCEL  button to exit set up mode    select the  CONSULTATION  button to access the set up without using  the password  All set up operations will be permitted but it will not be  possible to save the modifications     IMPORTANT  if the password is not known  the super password  yaka  can be  used   Only from the local interactive set up and only if  Administrator Hot Key  disabled  is set to  No   See Appendix A 10 2      3 2 8   Miscellaneous    Select the  Configuration   Terminal   Miscellaneous  menu to access the  following dialog box     Slave7sDefault Printer Port    Regional option       a  Default Printer Port    The default port is used for screen dumps or to select the default port for  printing via escape sequences  for text mode emulations      Printer parameters     Default port  press   Space   to select the port     Pre hardcopy String  available if  default port  isn t  none    character  string sent before a hardcopy     Post hardcopy String  available if  default port  isn t  none    character  string sent after a hardcopy  for example  OC  is a form feed     AX3000   U
171. line masking yes  multi intro alt    AX3000   User s Manual    number   number   number   number   click   amLl      yes     yes   ien    yes   character string  64 char max    IP address format   number   read only   read write   1 character   GMT format      hh mm     character string  32 char max        yes   first         fourth   last   sunday   monday       saturday   january         december   numeric   first         fourth   last   sunday   monday       saturday   january         december   numeric   haxadecimal   number     character string  32 char max    character string  32 char max                      n   n      n                        n                                           yes   no     number in range 1 to 6   number in range 1 to 6     yes   no   alt   shift   ctrl   alt shift  ctrl shift   ctrl alt           yes   no           277    Appendix AXEL    multi_s  112    Session Parameters    ctrl alt shift    number in range 2 to 123     In the following section of the file  for ease of reading the session number  1 to  6  has been represented by the     character  In a real configuration file  the  parameters for each session would  of course  be listed     S  predefined setup ansi       s  associate protocol telnet  s  serial main auxl1   s  serial aux aux2   55  associate host vangogh  S  secondary host    55 associate term ansi   s  associate devname    s  associate autoconn yes  s  associate reconn yes  s  associate label view 1  s  associate tcpport  
172. llowing box is displayed     24x80  IBM 3278 2 E  No   No   2 3270     lt Space gt        These parameters are      Alternate Screen Size  possible values are 24x80  32x80  43x80 and  27x132  This value set up a TERM default value      TERM Value  terminal capabilities  Default value is IBM 3278 2 E      Auto Connection  if this parameter is set to  yes   the connection will be  automatically established when the AX3000 is powered  Otherwise  the  user can press  lt Alt gt  lt Fx gt  to establish the connection      Auto Reconnection  if this parameter is set to  yes   a new connection is  automatically established after a disconnection  Otherwise  the user can  press   Alt     Fx   to establish a new connection      Session Label  this character string  11 characters max   is used to  identify the session within the session manger or in the status line      Enhanced parameters  see Appendix A 10 3     AX3000   User s Manual 175    Installing under OS 390 AXEL    7 2   USING THE TERMIMAL  7 2 1   The 3270 Status Line  Note  the 3270 status line is different than the AX3000 TCP IP status line     The 3270 status line is displayed at the bottom of the screen and gives the  following information                                                                                         Connection status Shift Caps Function key Assignment  Keyboard indicators   inser  SAM X      R 64    LL CC           Connection type  M  application  Available Keystrokes Cursor     system  Mode  R  
173. llowing diagram clarifies the concept of remote control with RDP protocol   the same principles apply for ICA connections         Windows Server    A     1                                   ET    1     e             Administrator    The procedure to take control of a remote  terminal is as follows     Open an administrator RDP connection  to the Windows server   Launch    Terminal Services Manager  from    Administrative Tools       All connected terminals are listed      select target for remote control     Activate  remote control  by right mouse  click     After the terminal   s user has given  authorization the remote control connection is  established  The administrator  sees  the  same screen as the terminal user     5 9 2   The Axel Remote Management Software  AxRM       A Windows administration utility  AxRM or Axel Remote Management  is  available at no charge from the Axel Web site  http   www axel com      For more information  please refer to Chapter 10 1     AX3000   User s Manual    137    AXEL Installing under OS 400    E  INSTALLING UNDER OS 400    AX3000   User s Manual 139    Installing under OS 400 AXEL    This chapter covers AX3000 installation under OS 400     This chapter describes the operation of the AX3000 in an OS 400 environment   For more general information about the AX3000  network and session settings   etc  please refer to the previous chapters     The AX3000 is able to handle both 5250 screen sessions  tn5250 emulation   and printers  protocol
174. lock this mode press the  lt CAPS gt  key     Caps Lock    same as    Shift Lock   But in addition ALL the keys  supported  including  lt Esc gt   function keys          Composed Characters   this parameter  only available in ASCII mode   sets the keyboard behavior for diacritical characters  for example      e             No  no specific processing is done     Local  composite characters are locally processed by the AX3000     Remote  SCO specific mode  mapchan       Euro Coding  this parameter is only available if the current character set  is not PC858 or IS08859 15  These 2 character sets include the Euro  symbol   The three values are      No  no specific processing is done     Standard  the Euro symbol replaces the international currency  symbol      within the current character set      Custom  any character can be replaced by the Euro symbol within  the current character set  use the decimal notation to enter the  Euro ASCII code         Scroll Lock    amp    Pause    enable or disable these two keys     Tabulations  a dialog box appears in which tab stops can be set      Init String  this character string is sent when the session  telnet or tty  is  established      Answer Back  session identifier  10 character max       AX3000   User s Manual 191    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL      Monitor Mode  the monitor mode is used to examine the data received  by the AX3000     No  monitor mode disabled     Yes  hexadecimal value    Yes  symbol   Remote Terminal Set Up  e
175. lt Fx gt  to establish a new connection      Session Label  this character string  11 characters max   is used to  identify the session within the session manger or in the status line      Enhanced parameters  see Appendix A 10 3     5 2   ICA SCREEN SESSION    The  Axel ICA compliant  protocol allows Axel terminals to be connected to  Metaframe XP  Presentation server 4  Presentation server 4 5 and Xen App 5     5 2 1   Setting Up an ICA Session    To set the ICA session  enter the AX3000 Set Up and select the   Configuration   Sessions   Session X  menu  where X is the session  number to be configured   The following box is displayed     Connection Parameters  Citrix           Published Application   lt Space gt      lt Space gt     lt Space gt   Session Parameters    lt Space gt     lt Space gt     lt Space gt      lt Space gt        96 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    Set the following parameters      Session Type  select  Citrix  ica       Connection Type  select  Server  local list          Server  or  Published  Application   See Chapter 5 2 2    Note  for  Citrix Desktop  see Chapter 5 3      ICA Browser Settings  only for  ICA Server  or  Published Application   target type   pressing  lt Space gt  displays a dialog box which allows certain  ICA Browsing parameters be changed  For more information  see  Chapter 5 2 2      Host or Published Application  the option for this setting depends on  the selected Target Type  See Chapter 5 2 2      C
176. main name and password  can be  provided by the terminal  This saves manually entering this information at every  login     This feature must be enabled at the Windows server level  by default an  automatic password is not accepted by the server      To allow automatic logon  within the  RDP Tcp  or ICA Tcp  Properties  box   click on the  Logon Settings  tab  The following information is displayed     Propri  t  s de RDP Tcp  21 x   Remote Control   Client Settings   Network Adapter   Permissions    General Logon Settings Sessions   Environment       User neme    Bomam        Always prompt for password       Annuler   Appliquer      Disable the  Always prompt for password  check box     AX3000   User s Manual 125    Installing under Windows AXEL    5 5 3   Idle Session Limit    When the AX3000 is powered off without logging out  the current TCP IP  connections remain active on the server side  see Chapter 5 5 3      To avoid these  phantom  sessions  an automatic clean up mechanism is  offered  This shuts down the idle sessions after a certain time     The idle session disconnection can be set either at the user settings level  see  the User Properties dialog box  or at a global level  For this second method   within the  RDP Tcp  or ICA Tcp  Properties    box  click on the  Sessions  tab   The following information is displayed     Propri  t  s de RDP Tcp BEI    Remote Control   Client Settings   Network Adapter   Permissions    General   Logon Settings Sessions Environment
177. martcard yes yes Firmware Option SCA          Audio USB USB                          VNC Server yes yes                                                             6 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Introduction to the AX3000    1 2   MAIN FUNCTIONS  1 2 1   Network Functions    The Axel terminal supports the following network functions     DHCP  obtaining an IP address and other parameters    DNS  publishing the terminal name and resolving server names    Routing  WAN connection    In addition for the AX3000 M75D and M85 there is a choice of the active  interfaces  either Ethernet or Wireless  Only one interface can be active but  each provides its own IP settings  DHCP  DNS  routers      IMPORTANT  the wireless interface can t be handled by the 0826 firmware  The  terminal must be upgraded with the 0922 firmware     1 2 2   Terminal Function    Each TCP IP AXEL terminal can support up to six concurrent and  independent sessions     This multi session capability provides multiple connections across a network   Each session can      Connect to any TCP IP networked server      Use different protocols  ica  vnc  rdp  telnet  ssh and tty       Have independent parameters  resolution  emulation  etc    Programmable keystrokes are used to open or hotkey between sessions     The maximum number of sessions is 6 but this can be limited to fewer sessions    Minimum 1     Note  the AX3000 can also act as a RS232 serial terminal   1 2 3   Print and Terminal Server  The AX3000 auxiliary po
178. mation only  This is the resolution selected in the   Configuration   Terminal   Screen  menu     Full Screen  two possible values     142 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 400      Yes   the session is displayed on the entire screen and the character  size is automatically adapted to the resolution and the number of  lines columns      No   the session is displayed in a  Window  mode and the character  size can be customized      Character Size  Only when  Full Screen    is disabled   Two possible  values     standard     8x16  or    double     16x32      Note  for more information  please refer to Appendix A 10 5     6 1 4   Customizing 5250 Emulation    Various 5250 emulation parameters can be modified but generally the default  values are the most suitable     To customize the 5250 emulation  enter the AX3000 Set Up and select the  session profile   Configuration   Sessions   Session X  menu   Three groups  of parameters control 5250 emulation settings     General Parameters  5250 emulation behavior     User defined Sequences  mapping 5250 functions to any PC keyboard  keys     Palette  remapping emulation colors     AX3000   User s Manual 143    Installing under OS 400 AXEL    a  5250 Emulation General Parameters    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  General Parameters  and press   lt Space gt   The following box is displayed     Display  National  Line  Blinking  Keyboard  Shift Lock  Standard  Enabled    Standard    Operating Mode  Yes  Cross  F
179. me    This parameter must be entered     Queue for Writer Messages  MSGQNAME   message queue name to  which the printer messages will be sent   Default value  QSY SOPR     MSGQNAME Library  MSGQLIB   associate message queue library   Default value   LIBL     Font Identifier  FONT   font number  3  4 or 5 digits     Default value  011     Host Print Transform  TRANSFORM   this parameter is not available   its value is always  yes       Manufacturer Type and Model  MFRTYPMDL   enter the printer driver  name  ex   NONE   HP4   NECP2        Default value   NONE     Paper Source 1  PPRSRC1   selected through list   Default value   MFRTYPMDL     Paper Source 2  PPRSRC2   selected through list    Default value   NONE     Envelope hopper  ENVELOPE   describes the paper source 3  selection  through list    Default value   NONE     ASCII 899 support  ASCII899   specifies if the code page ASCII 899 is  supported by the printer    Default value   NO     WSCST name  WSCSTNAME   qualified name of the customizing  object      WSCST library  WSCSTLIB   associated library           Note  if the auxiliary port used for printing is a serial port  set the  Printer  operating mode and set the associated parameters  baud rate  handshake  etc      AX3000   User s Manual 159    Installing under OS 400 AXEL    b  Advanced Settings    Within the Prt5250 box select  Enhanced Parameters  and press  lt Space gt   The  following dialog box is displayed     IBM 3812 1  Tes  Yes     lt Space gt     No      
180. med     After calibration touch screen events are automatically remapped to the  following mouse events      5250 emulations  left double click     Other emulations or protocols  left click    AX3000   User s Manual 39    Interactive Set Up AXEL    3 2 3   Audio    Select the  Configuration   Terminal   Audio  menu to access the following  dialog box     Audio     lt Space gt    5   By Buzzer  Sound Alerts   Long    Long    Front session only       a  Audio Device    When an audio device is detected its type is displayed  USB Audio   In this case  the following options are available      Hardware Information  miscellaneous information      Volume  setting up the volume  02mute       Sound Alerts  selecting the output device  buzzer or audio device     b  Sound Alerts    A sound alert is a bell sound  Two types of sound alerts are available  For each  one  the beep can be disabled or the duration can be set   Values  no  short   long or very long       Local  following an unexpected operation the terminal sounds a beep     Remote  the beep is requested by the server  escape sequence      Sounded for  set if the remote alert is played for  Front session only  or  for  Any session      40 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    3 2 4   Global RDP ICA    Select the  Configuration   Terminal   Global RDP ICA  menu to access  settings specific to RDP ICA environment  The following dialog box is displayed     USB Drives  Disabled    Keyboard    Default  40C  Caps Lock  
181. must be configured with   Direct connection to desktop  enabled  after the authentication stage  the    120 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    broker is no longer used  the RDP connection is directly established to the  virtual machine   To check  or change  this parameter  enter the  View server     configuration     With VIEW 4  enable the  Direct connection to desktop    option           Edit License     17 feb 2009 0 00 00 CET  Enabled  Enabled    License expiration   View Composer license   Offline Desktop license     Offline Desktop is an experimental feature  Any virtual  machines used with this feature are considered  experimental and will not be supported                       Global Settings     Edit     Session timeout  6 minutes   Require SSL for client connections  No  Reauthenticate after network interruption  No  Message security mode  Disabled  Direct connection for Offline Desktop Yes    operations   Require SSL for Offline Desktop operations  No  Disable SSO for Offline Desktop operations  No                                                                     Usage             em Pre login message  Yes  Refresh Reset highest Depia waning betore ced igeri Te  Session Type Current Highest Administrators  Total Active 1 2   Add     Active   Non linked clone 1 2           Active   linked clone 0      BUILTINMdministrators  Offline 0 0  Security Servers      VirtualCenter Servers Add    Edit    Remove Create Configuration File      Edit   
182. n  Message text for users attempting to log on  2  Interactive logon  Message title For users attempting to log on Not Defined  Interactive logon  Number of previous logons to cache  in case domain contro    10 logons                                           lanan wamak coe ka channa mance hafan           1A daue          Expand the tree to  Security Setting   Local Policies   Security Options   Set the  parameters  Accounts  Limit local accounts use of blank password to console  logon only  to  Disabled      5 5 6   Time Zone Redirection  A 2003 server allows individual terminals to negotiate and display a different    time zone to the server  This is useful where the server and terminals are in  different countries     128 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    For terminal configuration  please refer to Chapter 3 2 4    a  With a Windows TSE Server   By default  with a Windows 2003 server  the time zone redirection is disabled   To enable it run the  Group Policy Object Editor   GPEDIT MSC   See screen  shot in sub section d    Expand the tree to  Computer Configuration   Administrative Templates     Windows Components   Terminal Services   Data Client Server Redirection    Set the parameter  Enabling Time Zone Redirection  to  Enabled     b  With a Citrix Server   The time zone redirection can be enabled disabled either by the Farm s    properties or by creating a  Strategy   For more information  please read the  Citrix administrator s Guide     5 5 
183. n Properties  box  depending  on the session type this box is located in the  Sessions   Session x  menu or  the  Aux  Ports   xxx  menu      This is an example of the dialog box                    1024  512   64  Random  Disable  No    Telnet       Notes     The available parameters depend on both the connection type  screen or  auxiliary port  and the associated protocol     New values are used for the next TCP IP connection  no need to power   cycle the AX3000      a  The  Secondary Server  Parameter    A secondary server allows the user to select on which server the session is  connected to  The server is chosen when the session is established  A mini     AX3000   User s Manual 303    Appendix AXEL    menu is displayed     b  The  TCP        Parameter    This parameter is the server TCP port on which the session is connected  The  default values are 23 for telnet  2048 for tty  3389 for RDP and 1494 for ICA     c  The  mss          Window  Parameters    These two parameters are the AX3000 resources allocated to telnet and tty  screen sessions for receiving network data     mss  maximum segment size  is the largest segment of TCP data  This  size is negotiated with the server at the connection time     window is the reception windows size  i e  the size of the buffer on which  the TCP data is stored     It is not advisable to modify these two values unless the input data flow is not  continuous  i e  the data flow pauses and resumes regularly during scrolling      d  The  
184. n and keeping the characters ascetically  acceptable     To resolve this issue we offer two variables     Full screen or part screen  window      Options for character size and space between characters     Below is the dialogue box showing the options     also see chapters 6 1 3  7 1 2  and 8 1 4        a  Full Screen Mode  To provide similar appearance to legacy screens a full screen mode is offered     the session is displayed on the entire screen and the character size is  automatically adapted to the resolution and the number of lines columns     AX3000   User s Manual 309    Appendix AXEL    When the full screen mode is not selected the terminal calculates the optimal  spacing between characters and a window is displayed    The background color is selected through the menu  Configuration     Sessions   Local Desktop    See Chapter 3 6 1     A grey light frame surrounds the session     And the character size can be customized   See next sub section     Example        b  Size and spacing of characters    The terminal has a single font  size 8x16 pixels   but two options     Inserting spaces around character  horizontal and vertical  to    pad    the  character             8x16  small  10x24  standard       Doubling the size of the character     each pixel mapped to 4 pixels    310 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix          Axe 1    standard size double size  c  Information about Current Session  The  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt I gt  keystroke allows an information box
185. nable or disable the use of escape  sequences to set terminal parameters from the host computer     Mouse Allowed  enable disable the mouse within this session     Nullis Suppress  WYSE emulation only   if  yes   bytes with ASCII code  set to zero are skipped     b  Editing Keyboard Table    This dialog box allows certain keys to be remapped  This function is only  available in keyboard ASCII mode     Note  to remap keys not shown below use the  Key Mapping  function  described in the next chapter     Within the  Session Profile  box  select  User Defined Keys  and press  lt Space gt    The following box is displayed     Fi REIN   1B c 3  1B H   1B N  1B da j  1        1B O  1B e  1        1B P  1B f  1B v     1B o  1B g j X 1B D   1       1B h       1B E   1   5  1   1     SABLE   1B T  1   3   2     1B U  1B k     1B F   1       1B 1 3  1B B  NiB W  1B m 12   1B G   1       1B n SABIL   1       1B o Jf         1   7 3iB p  1B   1       1B q      BS  08h    1B b  1B r    CANCEL       192 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    There are three groups of programmable keys    From F1 to F48  function keys used singly or with a modifier key   Example for ANSI emulations    F1 to F12    Fx    F13 to F24   lt Shift gt  lt Fx gt   F25 to F36   lt Ctrl gt  lt Fx gt   F37 to F48   lt Ctrl gt  lt Shift gt  lt Fx gt      Numeric pad with Number Lock off     Special keys  Esc  Backspace and the    dot    of the numeric pad     To enter a programmable key value sele
186. nactive parameters   undefined hosts  print server unused  coloring mode disabled  etc  are  commented out     The sample configuration file  shown In the following pages  is typical of a file  obtained from an already configured AX3000  Notes and headings have been  inserted for clarification and would not appear in the file     Header    BEGIN AX SETUP V1 1  FE AE AE                       FE AE FE FE AE FE AE AE FE AE FE FE AE FE AE AE FE      AE FE FE AE FE AE AE TEHE                  TCP IP AX3000 Platine Terminal         Ethernet address  00 A0 34 00 27 10    Firmware  FK5 BV2 1a TCP FR 0826a STD      PEE HEE EHH EEE AE E FE AE FE EE FE AE AE EE HE EEE FE FE      EE EE RT             RESET_CMOS                      Note  the RESET_CMOS command allows all the set up parameters  except the  AX3000 IP address  to be reset  This line can be deleted or set as a comment        Substitution Commands    axname_encoding_string   yes   no     266 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    Enabling  axname_encoding_string  allows some set up parameters to contain     substitution commands   This allows variables such as the terminal name and  the session number  The substitution is done when a set up file is sent to the  terminal         this function is useful when multiple terminals are configured with the same  set up file  but each terminal requires certain unique parameters     Notes     It works only through the remote set up function   It s not available with  the interactiv
187. nction keys          Numpad Mode  this parameter sets the type of keyboard event sent  when pressing a key of the numpad      Standard  keyboard events are thus defined by the RFB protocol      ASCII  keyboard events are the same than the top row keys  above  QWERTY   With this mode an application can t distinguish is the  pressed key belong or not to the numpad  This mode may be  required for some JAVE based applications         numpad   the two available values are the dot     and the comma            Scroll Lock    amp    Pause    enable or disable these two keys       Alt Gr   Mode  this parameter sets the type of keyboard event sent  when pressing   Alt Gr    located at the right of the space bar      Standard  the keyboard event is AltGr                  the keyboard events are   Ctrl   and   Alt    left of the  space bar       Local Mouse Cursor  if  no   the mouse cursor is fully handled by the  VNC server  If  yes   the behavior depends on the VNC server version               V3  as above the mouse cursor is handled by Xvnc  In  addition the local mouse cursor location is indicated by a little  square pointer  2x2 pixels   This can be useful when the local  mouse cursor location is different from the VNC cursor location  for  example when the Unix Linux server or the network is overloaded                V4  the mouse cursor is handled by the AX3000  With a low   bandwidth  this allows the mouse cursor to be more reactive     AX3000   User s Manual 209    Installing u
188. nder UNIX LINUX AXEL     Emulate a 3 button Mouse  if  yes   the mouse middle button is  emulated by clicking both left and right buttons      Mouse Sensitivity  This setting varies the sample rate of the mouse  If  the sensitivity is increased the mouse movement will be more fluid  but  also network activity is increased     8 2 2   Configuring VNC on the Unix Linux Server  Axel provides software for configuring VNC terminals under Linux  AXGVNC     AxGVNC checks the Linux configuration and allows  if needed  some system  modifications to be automatically done     a  Installing AXGVNC  Use  gzip  and  tar  command to extract files from AxGVNC tar gz     Copy the AxGVNC binary file and the languages files    Ing  in your preferred  folder     210 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    b  Analyzing Linux    After being launched AxGVNC automatically checks the Linux settings and  allows  or not  VNC terminals to be configured     Graphical AxVNC  File Help    System Analyze    b wf System   b   f Graphical  X11   b sf VNC Server             Problems are indicated by red indicators and an attempt to rectify is made by  double clicking     When all indicators are green  click the  Next  button     AX3000   User s Manual 211    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    c  Configuring VNC Terminals    The following dialog box is displayed                                                          VNC Terminals Management   X  One VNC Server per Terminal   One TCP Por
189. nfigured   The following box is displayed           Connection Parameters  6250  no server   lt Space gt    lt Space gt   Session Parameters     lt Space gt    lt Space gt      lt Space gt    lt Space gt        AX3000   User s Manual 141    Installing under OS 400 AXEL    These parameters are      Session Type  select  5250      Server  press  lt Space gt  to select the server from a list     Connection Properties  pressing  lt Space gt  displays a dialog box which  lets certain connection parameters be changed  See Chapter 6 1 6      Auto Logon  press  lt Space gt  to set the Auto Signon function  see  Chapter 6 1 5       Terminal Name  DEVNAME   if this name is left blank  the OS 400 will  associate a dynamic name to this terminal  i e   QPADEVOO1       Display Parameters  press   Space    to set display settings  For more  information  see the next chapter      Additional Parameters  pressing   Space   displays a dialog box which  lets certain emulation parameters be changed  See Chapter 6 1 5      Key Mapping  pressing   Space   displays a dialog box which lets any  keys be remapped  See Chapter 6 1 5      Palette  pressing   Space    displays a dialog box which lets emulation  colors be remapped  See Chapter 6 1 5    Save and exit the set up  The AX3000 is ready for use     6 1 3   Display Parameters    Within the  Session Profile    box  select  Display Parameters  and press    Space    The following box is displayed        These parameters are     Resolution  For infor
190. nual    AXEL Installing under Windows    c  Redirecting Resources within the RDP session    To redirect resources within a session select the session profile box  menu   Configuration   Sessions   Session X    Within this box  select  Redirected  Resources  and press  lt Space gt   The following box is displayed     Printers    no  COM LPT Ports   All  USB Drives   No    Read Write  single session     Smartcards  No       These parameters are     Redirected Printer  printer s  are selected through a list  This list is  composed by the following items     All    None    Printer Name  port   these are the RDP ICA printer name s   This  allows the selection of only one printer to be redirected     Default printer  set  or not  a printer as the default printer     Redirected COM LPT Port  COM port s  are selected through a list  This  list is composed by the following items     All    None            port   these are the               port name s   This allows the  selection of only one port to be redirected     Redirected USB Drive  enable disable the mass storage device  redirection  The  Access Permission    value reminds the selected mode   see Chapter 3 2 4      AX3000   User s Manual 93    Installing under Windows AXEL      Redirected Smartcards  enable disable the smartcard redirection      Auto Connection  when set to yes  the option allows the ICA session to  be automatically established when a smartcard is inserted in the reader      Redirected Sound  enable disable the
191. o modes for this keystroke             Local  the keystroke is handled by the AX3000 and is used for  shutdown the terminal  see Chapter 4 5      Remote  the keystroke is handled by the Windows server  for  example opening the task manager         Scroll Lock    amp    Pause    enable or disable these two keys    5 2 5   Automatic Logon and Auto Run    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Auto Logon  and press   Space    The  following box is displayed     Application       These parameters are      Username  this is the default value for the username field of the Login  Screen      Automatic Logon  set this parameter to  Yes  to get an automatic logon   For more information about the auto login  see Chapter 5 5 2      Password  available only if  Automatic Logon  is set to  Yes    press    Space   to enter the password      Domain  this is the default value for the Windows domain field of the  Login screen     AX3000   User s Manual 101    Installing under Windows AXEL      Auto Run  by default the Terminal Services connection offers a Windows  desktop  To automatically launch a program set this parameter to  Yes   and complete the following fields      Command  available only if  Auto Run  is set to  yes    the program path  and file name of the program to be launched    Example  sSystemRoot  system32 cmd exe     Working Directory  available only if  Auto Run  is set to  yes    program  working directory   Example  D       5 2 6   Redirected Resources    The redirected
192. ocol  See Chapter 5 1     Citrix s ICA protocol  Two connection types are available     To a published server or application  See Chapter 5 2     Through a local desktop  like Nfuse  WEB Interface and Program  Neighborhood   See Chapter 5 3     A virtual desktop  See Chapter 5 4     These protocols enable a remote graphical display on the AX3000  The image  is constructed  maintained and updated within the Windows server     5 1   RDP SCREEN SESSION    Axel terminals provide an embedded RDP compatible protocol  The following  table shows key features available for each operating system                                         Number of colors Redirection   bits pixel  Printer   COM Port   Audio  NT4 TSE 8 bpp        Windows 2000 8 bpp Yes      Windows 2003 9 bpp   15 bpp  Yes Yes Yes  16 bpp and 24 bpp  Windows 2008 8 bpp  16 bpp and 32 bpp Yes Yes Yes          84 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    5 1 1   Setting Up an RDP Session    To set an RDP session  enter the AX3000 Set Up and select the   Configuration   Sessions   Session X  menu  where X is the session  number to be configured   The following box is displayed     Connection Parameters  TSE  rdp   no server   lt Space gt    lt Space gt   Session Parameters   lt Space gt    lt Space gt    lt Space gt      lt Space gt        Set the following parameters      Session Type  select  TSE  rdp       Server  press   Space   to select the server from a list     Connection Properties  pressing   Space  
193. odel      AX3000   User s Manual 161    Installing under OS 400 AXEL      8928  Change of device failed   during the printer modification operation   reconnection with different parameters   at least one parameter is  detected wrong  ex   non existing printer model       8930  Message queue does not exist    the message queue or its library  doesn t exist      AX01  Terminal type not recognized   the TERM variable  by default IBM   3812 1  associated with the AX3000 auxiliary port is not correct     Note  all possible errors are listed in the RFC 2877   6 3 2   Setting Up and Using an LPD Printer  Set the auxiliary port as shown in Chapter 3 5 2     To add a system printer invoke the following command  AXPRTO1 is the  OS 400 printer name          gt  CRTDEVPRT DEVD AXPRT01  DEVCLS  VRT  TYPE 3812  MODEL 1  FONT 11     To associate this printer with the AX3000 LPD port  you have to change its  outqueue         gt  CHGOUTQ OUTQ AXPRTO1  RMTSYS  INTNETADR  RMTPRTQ  PARALLEL      CNNTYPE  IP  DESTTYPE  OTHER  TRANSFORM  YES  MFRTYPMDL   NECP2   INTNETADR  192 168 1 240         Where     AXPRTO1   OS 400 outqueue name    PARALLEL   AX3000 Printer Port Name  Uppercase letters are required     NECP2   printer model  here a NEC type P2     192 168 1 240   AX3000 IP address    Note  if the outqueue is not started  invoke the STRRMTWTR command     At the OS 400 level this printer is seen as an outqueue and is not allowed to  control it as a device   For example  it is not possible to s
194. of models 75 75B 75E    FK17  former production hardware of models 65B  10 100BaseT     FK18  former production hardware of models 75C    FK19  former production hardware of models 75C    FK20  former production hardware of models 65C    FK30  former production hardware of models 70W    FK31  current production hardware of models 70W    FK35  former production hardware of models 70F    FK36  current production hardware of models 70F    FK40  former production hardware of models 75C    FK41  current production hardware of models 75D    312 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix      FK45  current production hardware of models 65C    FK51  current production hardware of models 85    FK55  current production hardware of models 80F    Note  the correct firmware file must be downloaded for your AX3000 hardware   Example  if FK14 firmware file is downloaded into FK11 hardware  the  download process will fail     A 11 2   Firmware Information    The firmware version is FCT NA yywwi STD    FCT is the AX3000 operating mode  always TCP    NA is the firmware nationality  code is ISO compliant   The main  nationalities are     XX  International  except for the following countries     BR  Brazil    CZ  Czechoslovakia    DK  Denmark    EE  Estonia    Fl  Finland    FR  France    GR  Greece    IS  Iceland    PL  Poland    PT  Portugal    RU  Russia    51  Slovenia    SK  Slovakia    TR  Turkey   yywwi is the year and the week number of the firmware creation  following by an alphabetical in
195. ogical Port    A logical port must be manually released  This operation can be performed only  when the USB device is no longer connected     AX3000   User s Manual 53    Interactive Set Up AXEL    In the menu  Configuration   Ports   USB Logical Ports  select the logical  port and press  lt Enter gt   The following box is displayed     Product    Associated Service    RDP  ICA printer parameters       Select the  DELETE  button to release the logical port     The released logical port is removed from the list of the associated ports and is  now available for the next USB device     3 4 7   Connecting a USB RS232 Adaptor   a  Overview   A USB RS232 adaptor is normally a cable with USB connector at one end and  one or more serial connectors  DB9 or DB25  at the other end  This allows  serial devices to be connected when no native serial ports are available    This technology is sometimes embedded in USB devices  For example touch    screens or card readers  These devices have a USB connector but are based  on serial technology and are seen as serial ports     54 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    b  Configuration    A logical USB port is allocated to the USB RS232 adaptor   See attaching and  releasing operations in the Chapter 3 4 6   For example     Product    Line Parameters    Printer  9600  871 No  High  High    None  Associated Service  None    RDP ICA Redirection  No       This USB logical port allows the adaptor to be configured  line parameters   bau
196. ollows the cursor  Yes  Yes  No       These parameters are     EBCDIC Character Set  possible values are     National  characters are keyboard nationality dependent      Multinational     A specific keyboard nationality  American  French         Cursor Shape  Line  Half Block or Block   Note  to change the cursor shape from a 5250 session press  lt Alt gt  lt F11 gt    or  lt Alt Gr gt  lt F11 gt  with a PC keyboard      Cursor Style  Blinking or Steady     CAPS Key Mode  set the CAPS LOCK to behave in either of three ways     Caps Lock  each alphabetical key sends the corresponding upper  case letter  To unlock this mode press the  lt CAPS gt  key     Shift Lock  each key send the same character sent by pressing   lt Shift gt  lt This key gt   To unlock this mode press a  lt Shift gt  key     144 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 400      Uppercase  each key send the upper character if it is present   Otherwise  this is the lower character  upper case letter if possible   which is sent   lt Shift gt  key acts in the standard way  whatever the  CAPS key   To unlock this mode press the  lt CAPS gt  key     Caps Lock    same as  Shift Lock   But in addition ALL the keys  supported  including  lt Esc gt   function keys          Euro Coding  Euro symbol support  The three possible values are      No  no specific processing is done     Standard  the Euro symbol replaces the international currency  symbol  a  within the current character set      Custom  any charac
197. omatic Logon and Auto Run                   essen 101  5 2 6   Redirected Hesources                   senes 102  5 2  7   Bandwidth  s  eo det d cuts 107  5 2 8   Connection Properties                   sese 108  5 3   CITRIX  PUBLISHED APP  DESKTOP  5  58                                     108  5 3 1   General Configuration of the Published App  Desktop session      108  5 3 2   Desktop Parameters                  sse eene 112  5 3 3   Using the  Published App                                                               113  5 4   VIRTUAL DESKTOP SESSION              see eene 116  5 4 1   Setting Up an Virtual Desktop 5                                                      116  5 4 2   Connection Type and Browser             5                                         117  5 4 3   Available Desktop                          sse 118  5 4 4   Automatic                                      nnne nene 119  5 4 5   Using the  Virtual Desktop  Session                                               120  5 4 6   Configuring the VDM Connection                                                    120  5 5   CONFIGURING THE WINDOWS SERVER  ICA RDP                         122    5 5 1   Encryption                    ian tnn nnne nnne 123    5 5 2  Atomatic LOJON       iin ail aetna nile le 125    5 9 3 Idle  Session              HR HERE eA 126  5 5 4   Desktop Background with Windows 2003                                      127  5 5 5   Allowing Blank Passwords with Windows 2003             
198. onnection Properties  pressing  lt Space gt  displays a dialog box which  lets certain connection parameters be changed  See Chapter 5 2 8      Auto Logon  press   Space   to set the  Automatic Logon  function  and or the  Auto Run  function  For more information  see Chapter 5 2 5     Display Parameters  press   Space   to set display settings  resolution   and colors   For more information  see Chapter 5 2 3      Additional Parameters  pressing   Space   displays a dialog box  which  lets certain ICA parameters be changed  For more information  see  Chapter 5 2 4      Redirected Resources  press   Space   to set redirected resources   printers  COM ports  etc    For more information  see Chapter 5 2 6      Bandwidth  pressing   Space    displays a dialog box which lets certain  parameters be changed  For more information  see Chapter 5 2 7     Note  after saving changes power cycle the AX3000     5 2 2   Connection Types and ICA Browser Settings  a  Connection Types    An ICA session is associated with one of the following connection types      Server  local list   this is a server previously entered through the menu   Configuration   Network   Servers   Select the  Server  parameter and  press   Space   to display the server list     ICA Server  this is a server from the Citrix server farm  Select the   Server  parameter and manually enter the server name or press   F2   to  browse the Citrix server farm     AX3000   User s Manual 97    Installing under Windows AXEL      P
199. orts are  auxiliary ports  parallel  Aux1  and Aux2   USB logical ports and network printers     AX3000   User s Manual 89    Installing under Windows AXEL    Select the dialog box of the  Connection port   menu  Configuration   Ports               For example  the Aux1 port     Line Parameters    Printer  9600  871 No  No  High  High  None    Associated Service  None    RDP ICA Redirection          Set the  Active  parameter to  As Printer    or  As Printer and COM   Then select     Printer Parameters    and press   Space    The following box is displayed     Generic   Text Only    15       These parameters are      Printer Name  name of the Windows printer   User definable     Windows TSE Driver  printer driver name  It is ESSENTIAL that the  value entered here matches the printer driver name exactly as installed  on the server  If the match is not exact Windows will not be able to  connect the printer to the driver and the printer will not be added to the  Windows spooler      Time_out  sec   in event of a printer error  no paper  off line  etc    this is  the delay before the terminal reports the error to Windows     The printer declaration is completed  For the redirection procedure  consult the    90 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    sub section c      NOTE  In the event of problems log in as administrator to determine the user  profile has correct permission levels    b  Declaring a Redirected COM LPT Port    On an RDP ICA connection a redirect
200. orts are available for peripheral devices      Auxiliary ports  one parallel port  two native serial ports  Aux1 and  Aux2  and USB serial devices  Aux3          USB logical ports  a USB logical port is automatically created when a  USB printer is connected  Four USB logical ports are available  see  Chapter 3 4 6      Network Printers  a TCP logical port  Net1 and Net2  allows a network  printer  or a network print server  to be addressed in the same way as a  local printer     The AX3000  auxiliary and logical  ports can be accessed in various ways    By a network service          tty  prt5250  etc   The management of the  ports is independent of the active screen session     By an RDP or ICA session  see Chapter 5     By escape sequences  transparent mode or embedded printing   This  provides compatibility with applications designed for serial terminals     3 5 1   Setting Up the Ports    This chapter covers selecting  setting up and choosing the network service for  each port   Also see Chapter 3 5 2     Note  within the dialog boxes the  ASCII TEST  button verifies communication  between the AX3000 port and the connected device  This test works in all port  configurations    Warning  if ASCII format is not supported by the printer  the banner won t be  displayed     a  Setting Serial Ports  Note  a serial port is       A native serial port  Aux1 and Aux2 for models 65 and 75      A USB serial device  USB RS232 adaptor  touch screen  card reader        AX3000   User s Man
201. ows    application icons  screen resolution  number of colors and folder information   This leaves 5 sessions for either published applications or other emulations   telnet  As400  5250  VNC or RDP     If the user is authorized with more than 5 applications  icons for all the  published applications will be displayed  but only 5 applications can be used  concurrently  To access the    sixth    application one of the initial 5 applications  will require closing     Configuration principles for a Citrix only environment      The terminal supports 6 sessions  When  Published App  Desktop  is  selected one session is required by the desktop connection itself  the  other 5 are available for published applications     The number of published applications  sessions  can be set to between 1  and 5      The published application sessions are  reserved  without specifying the  application     The Citrix published application sessions are always set up descending  from session number 6  For example if three sessions are reserved they  will be sessions 6  5 and 4  Session 1 is used by the desktop and  sessions 2 and 3 are available for other emulations  i e  telnet or As400   see next chapter       Only one  Published App  Desktop  session is possible per terminal     Configuration principles for a mixed environment      The terminal supports 6 sessions  When the  Published App  Desktop  is  selected one session is required by the desktop connection itself  the  other 5 are available for
202. pd printers  refer to the chapter related to your    operating system in this manual     64 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    3 5 3   Connecting a Serial Terminal    Two serial terminals        be attached to the AX3000   s serial ports  These serial  terminals communicate with the target server s  using the AX3000   s embedded  telnet service     To configure the telnet service for the chosen serial port  select the   Configuration   Ports   xxx    yyy  dialog and enter the following parameters     Service  select telnet     Parameters  press  lt Space gt  to access the following box          Server  name of the server selected from a menu  see Chapter 3 1 3       TCP Port  numeric identifier of the telnet service on the target server    Default value is 23       TERM  the value of this variable is  negotiated   between the server  and the AX3000      Auto Connection  if this parameter is set to  yes   the connection will  be automatically established when the AX3000 is powered up   Alternatively the user can press any key on the serial terminal  keyboard to initiate the connection      Auto Reconnection  if this parameter is set to  yes  a new connection  is automatically established after a disconnection  If set to    no    the  user can press any keyboard key to establish a new connection      Enhanced parameters  see Appendix A 10 3     Note  the serial auxiliary port used must be configured for  bi directional   operating mode     AX3000   User s Manu
203. pecial AX3000 operating parameters  Usually the  default values are suitable     AX3000   User s Manual 299    Appendix AXEL    All these general parameters are located in a specific dialog box in menu   Configuration   Advanced   Tuning      Network  Yes    Yes    Keyboard    PC   No  Parallel Port   None   Standard  Transmit Fifo   Yes   Yes  Miscellaneous       a  The  IP Addr  Set by Ping  Parameter    This parameter allows or disables the AX3000 IP Address to be set by a ping  command   See Appendix A 7      Note  a new value takes immediately effect   b  The    Allow Network Discover  Parameter    By default  SNMP requests are supported by Axel terminals  This allows  terminals to be discovered by AxRM  the Axel administration software      This parameter can be used to disabled the SNMP support     Note  changing this value takes immediately effect   c  The  Keyboard Type    Parameter    By default PC keyboards  102 105 keys  are supported by the AX3000  but    300 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    other keyboards type are available for special use     AS400  F24   122 keys keyboard  24 function keys  for 5250 emulation     ANSI  F20   keyboard with 20 function keys for VT220 emulation     Note  this keyboard type modification takes immediately effect     Note  Do not experiment with keyboard types     i e  if you do not have        5400  keyboard do not select   5400    d  The  Screen Type  Parameter  Note  this parameter is only available with the firmware T
204. ppendix A 5         ERR 202  xxx  invalid value     Command  setup_send   Cause  the value assigned to this set up parameter  xxx  is not  valid  example  mult i_nbpage 10     Consequence  the set up parameter is ignored  The current value of this  parameter is retained    Solution  check the possible values of this parameter  Appendix A 5      AX3000   User s Manual 243    Remote Administration AXEL       ERR 203  xxx  no place to store udk value     Command  setup_send   Cause  not enough memory to store the udk_xxx parameter  udk  stands for User Defined Key  a function key for example     Consequence  the default value of this udk parameter is restored     ERR 204  line s  after the trailer label ignored           Command  setup_send   Cause  END_AX_SETUP is not the last line of the file    Consequence  the lines after the trailer label are ignored  The AX3000 set   up is updated    Solution  delete these lines                 ERR 211  service name number error  Service s  may be reset     Command  setup_send   Cause  Other services  such as print or tty  use the same identifier   TCP port or name     Consequence  to get a consistent configuration  some services have been  removed    Solution  check service identifier values        ERR 212  host error  Host s  may be reset     Command  setup_send   Cause  host parameters are missing or two host names are  identical    Consequence  to get a consistent configuration  some hosts may have been  removed    Solution  check the 
205. printer name and AS 400   connection status      printd or rtty  TCP port and optional filter      State  see above for the possible values        A connection can be manually closed by selecting the  CLOSE CONNECTION   button                    Note  to refresh the information displayed  select the  REFRESH  button           9 2 2    TCP Server  and  TCP Client  Connection Information    To go further with connection information  two additional statistics dialog boxes  are available     TCP server  contains information about connections where the AX3000  is acting as a server          rtty and               TCP client  contains information about connections where the AX3000 is  acting as a client  telnet  tty  rdp  ica and vnc      These statistics show the following     Information about connections    Values of counters    These dialog boxes are accessed by the  Diagnostics   Statistics   TCP xxx     yyy  menu     228 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Tools and Statistics    Example of a Connection box     TCP Client Statistics    CONNECTIONS STATE  Who Type State Local Socket Remote Socket    REFRESH       Description of the information given within this box     Who  AX3000 resource involved in the connection  S1  session 1        S8   session 8   Aux1  Aux2  PARA  parallel   Usb1       Usb4  Net1 and Net2     Type  network service being used  telnet  tty  etc      State  the possible values are     Established  the session is connected     Closed  the session has ended     
206. r if it is present   Otherwise  this is the lower character  upper case letter if possible   which is sent   lt Shift gt  key acts in the standard way  whatever the  CAPS key   To unlock this mode press the  lt CAPS gt  key     Caps Lock    same as  Shift Lock   But in addition ALL the keys  supported  including  lt Esc gt   function keys          Euro Coding  Euro symbol support  The three possible values are      No  no specific processing is done     Standard  the Euro symbol replaces the international currency  symbol  s  within the current character set      Custom  any character can be replaced by the Euro symbol within  the current character set  use the decimal notation to enter the  Euro EBCDIC code          numpad   the two available values are the dot     and the comma            Scroll Lock    amp    Pause    enable or disable these two keys     Rulers Style  the  rule  function allows the cursor to be located easily  among other characters  Three types of rules are available      Cross  a horizontal line and a vertical line indicate the cursor  location      Horizontal  a horizontal line is displayed at the cursor line      Vertical  a vertical line is displayed at the cursor column    Press   Rule    or   Alt Gr gt  lt F12 gt  with a PC keyboard  to enable disable  the rule function from a 3270 session      Behavior  the two values are   follows the cursor  or  fixed      Mouse Allowed  enable disable the mouse within this session    b  Remapping 3270 Functions 
207. rate  handshake  etc       The supported resources are     Screen sessions  sess1  sess2        Auxiliary ports  aux1  aux2  parallel  netX and usbX     Use the following command to reset a resource       rsh axname ax sinit password ress    Where    axname   AX3000 name   etc hosts  or IP address    ax sinit   command to reset the resource     password   specify the set up password if set    ress   resource name  ex  sess1      c  Editing the AX3000 Settings  The whole AX3000 set up can be obtained by invoking the following command       rsh axname setup get  gt   tmp axel    222 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    or a partial set up can also be obtained  only used set up parameters are sent        rsh axname setup_get_lite  gt   tmp axel    Where                    AX3000 name   etc hosts  or IP address     setup_get   command for getting the whole set up      setup get lite  command for getting the partial set up   For more information about these commands  refer to Chapter 10   d  Setting Up the AX3000    The contents of a file is used to set up the AX3000       rsh axname setup send password     tmp axel    Where     axname   AX3000 name   etc hosts  or IP address    setup send   command for set up the AX3000    password   specify the set up password if set     For more information about this command  refer to Chapter 10   e  Downloading Firmware    To download an AX3000 firmware through TFTP       rsh axname ax download password  axfirm axel 1
208. rd a series of keystrokes proceed as follows     Press   Alt Gr gt  lt F4 gt  to set the record mode     Press any of the 12 function keys to which you want to assign     Type the key sequence you want to save     Press   Alt Gr     F4   to exit the record mode     Notes     Memory usage  maximum 256 keystrokes recorded per function key     To delete a recorded function key  you have to record an empty key  sequence     Example     1  Press   Alt Gr gt  lt F4 gt  to set the Record mode  The 3270 status line is  set in reverse video mode and the following information is displayed   the 12 boxes are the 12 function keys  a solid box means that data is    recorded    MEMOR moco OOOO OOOO 17 21       2  Press one of the function keys  from  lt F1 gt  to  lt F12 gt    The 3270 status  line is set in normal mode and the following information is displayed           R 256 F1 17 21       Note   R  indicates the Record mode  The second field is the maximum  keystrokes that can be recorded for this session  The third field is the  selected function key     3   Type the key sequence   4  To exit the Record mode  press   Alt Gr gt  lt F4 gt      AX3000   User s Manual 179       Installing under OS 390 AXEL    b  Processing a Key Sequence    To execute a series of keystrokes that have been recorded     Press  lt Alt Gr gt  lt F5 gt  to set the Process mode     Press the recorded function key     The key sequence is processed     Example     1  Press   Alt Gr gt  lt F5 gt  to set the Proces
209. reboot   command  Example for Unix Linux       rsh axname ax reboot password    Note about password  specify the password if the set up is password   protected     The message  Reboot in progress    is then displayed on the operator s  console  the AX3000 is reset and the new set up is implemented  If a  connection problem occurs  a time out error message is displayed     10 4 2   Obtaining a Configuration    To obtain the configuration from an existing AX3000 terminal  use the   setup get  command  or  setup get lite  command   This command sends     list of all AX3000 parameters to standard output  Example for Unix Linux       rsh axname setup get  gt   tmp file lt CR gt   The message        set up in progress       is displayed on the    operators console when the rsh command is processing  If a connection  problem occurs a time out error message is displayed     240 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Remote Administration    When the set up parameters have been loaded  the message  OK  set up  sent  is displayed on the operator   s console  If other messages are displayed   refer to chapter 10 3 3     The configuration file lists each set up parameter  Refer to Appendix A 5 for a  detailed description of this file     10 4 3   Error Messages    There are two types of error      Fatal errors  numbered from 100 to 114      Warning errors  numbered from 200 to 221   a  Fatal Errors    Fatal errors stop the remote command  The following fatal errors may occur     ERR 101  header 
210. rformed through the  Terminal  Services Configuration  utility  in the  Administrative Tools  folder      122 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    When this utility is run the dialog box below is displayed                    Terminal Services Configuration 15   x   Ade                gt   f   AE  2   Tree     Connection  Transport  Type   Comment        Terminal Services Configuration     1                 Citrix ICA 3 0  ARE SCSRDP Icp     tcp Microsoft RDP 5 2    91  28  Server Settings    Select  Connections  in the left panel  On the right panel  double click the line   RDP Top  or   ICA Tcp   to configure the RDP server  or ICA server   Another  dialog box is displayed  It allows setting      The encryption level      The automatic logon      The idle session limit     5 5 1   Encryption Level    The data flow between the RDP or ICA server and the client is generally  encrypted  The encryption mechanism depends on the protocol     a  RDP Protocol    Three encryption levels are available     Low  only the data flow from the client to the server is encrypted  i e   user names and passwords      Client compatible  or medium   data flowing in both directions  from the  client to the server and from the server to the client  is encrypted     High  data flowing in both directions is encrypted to a higher level     The terminal encryption level must match that of the server     AX3000   User s Manual 123    Installing under Windows AXEL    Note  despite it
211. ring  10 char max    aux  associate font 11  character string  10 char max    aux  associate mfrtypmdl  NONE  character string  10 char max    aux  associate pprsrcl   character string  10 char max            AX3000   User s Manual 269    Appendix AXEL    aux  associate pprsrc2  NONE          LE     aux  associate envelope  NO  aux  associate ascii899 no  aux  associate wscstname   aux  associate wscstlib   aux  associate transp   aux  associate transp seq   aux  associate prn    aux  associate prnname   aux  associate prndriver   aux  associate prntimer 15  aux  associate com yes  aux  associate comname   aux  associate comdsr     aux  tcp window 1024  aux  tcp mss 512  aux  tcp ttl 264   aux  tcp setport random  aux  tcp nagle disable  aux  tcp keepalive no       aux  tcp keepaliveval 120  aux  use bi directional  aux  speed 38400    aux  data    aux  tx hdsk dtr    aux  rx hdsk dtr    aux  detect none  aux  dtr init  aux  rts init  aux  tx fifo yes  aux  seq     270             printer   bi directional      character string  10 char max     character string  10 char max     yes   no     character string  8 char max     character string  8 char max     yes   yes hexa     character string  4 char max     yes   no     cha  ne de 16 caract  res max     cha  ne de 64 caract  res max     number     yes   no     number     follow CTS   follow CD    always low   allows up    number     number     number     ramdom   fixed     disable   enable     yes   no     number               
212. ring  5 char max                            colors       n   n                french   german   italian  spanish   belgian   english  american   portuguese   dutch    swiss german   swiss french      d Buzzer   By Audio Device     S   turk f   iceland     no   yes     on   off     on   off     n   long   short   very long    n   long   short   very long   Na   medium   high     low   medium   high     number         no   yes     no   yes           aux    parallel   usb     net       character string  48 char max      character string  48 char max             ELO     n          MicroTouch   Liyitec     auxl   aux2   usb    dub    AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    term_touchscr_xhigh 0  term_touchscr_ylow 0  term_touchscr_yhigh 0  term_touchscr_accuracy 20  term_usbptr_events   term_usbptr_transpose     term_autoconf_force no    term_autoconf_to   term_autoconf_dhcp   term_autoconf_name   term_autoconf_ip   term_autoconf_port     term_usbdriveredir   term_driveletter   term_gmt  00 00       term gmt name Greenwich       term daylight yes   term summer day last   term summer dayofweek sunday  term summer month march   term summer hour 2   term winter day last   term winter dayofweek sunday  term winter month october  term winter hour 3   term win  kbcode 409   term ScardReader  Id    term ScardReader  vendor        term ScardReader  ifd        term ScardReader  force     Multi session Parameters    multi nbsession 6   multi nbpage 1   multi statusline yes   multi status
213. rough either the AX3000 Quick Set Up or the AX3000  Interactive Set up  For more information  see Chapters 2 and 3     256 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    A 3 3   Using the AX3000    If the DHCP protocol is enabled the AX3000 automatically requests an IP  address on boot and the following dialog box is displayed     DHCP  searching  please wait    Note  the search can be aborted by entering the set up    If a DHCP  or BOOTP  server is available an IP address is given after a few  seconds  This dialog box is then cleared and the AX3000 follows its normal  behavior  either the set up idle is displayed  no automatic session is set  or an  automatic connection is opened     Further  lease time  re negotiations are totally invisible to the AX3000 user  Only  error messages are displayed  see next chapter      Note  enter the set up to find out the AX3000 IP address or other parameters  offered by the          server     A 3 4   Errors  a  Boot Time Failure  The AX3000 automatically searches for a DHCP server on booting  If after 30    seconds no DHCP  or BOOTP  server answers the following dialog box is  displayed     DHCP NEGOTIATION FAILED    Please contact your network administrator    Press  lt F11 gt  to reboot       At this stage two options are available      lt F11 gt   rebooting the AX3000 to run the DHCP search again       Ctrl     Alt     Esc    entering the set up to modify AX3000 settings     AX3000   User s Manual 257    Appendix AXEL    b  Re negotiation 
214. rs      Protocol  select tftp      Filename  path and name of the firmware file   back slashes for this character string must be doubled  For example   CMAXELWFIRM      AX3000 IP  this is an IP address only used during the downloading  operation  It can differ from the current IP address      tftp Host IP  name or IP address of the tftp host      tftp Router IP  optional   name or IP address of a router via which the  tftp host can be reached     AX3000   User s Manual 293    Appendix AXEL    When the  OK  button is selected  the download operation begins   For more information about the download process see Chapter A 9 4     A 9 3   Downloading by BOOTP and TFTP Protocols    This procedure is divided into 2 steps     bootp  obtaining firmware file information     tftp  downloading firmware file     The bootp protocol is used get the location  IP address of the tftp host and  filename  of the firmware file  This information is obtained by means of a  broadcast     Information concerning this firmware file must have been configured within the  bootp host     Prerequisites for bootp     The bootpd process must be run on the bootp host     The bootpd configuration file   etc bootptab  must list an entry for every  AX3000 which can download firmware    The bootp host must be directly accessed by the AX3000  not via a  router   Otherwise  a bootp relay host must be set up     The main capabilities of the bootpd configuration file are as follows      tc  network description     ht 
215. rts can be managed either       By a network service  LPD or PRT5250 for printers  TELNET CLIENT for  serial terminals or TTY for other peripherals     AX3000   User s Manual 7    Introduction to the AX3000 AXEL      By escape sequences  compatible with serial terminals   slave mode   1 2 4   Tools and Statistics    Embedded AX3000 tools provide the following features     Ping     Remote set up     Statistical environment     Firmware downloading     8 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Initial Power On     2   INITIAL POWER ON    AX3000   User s Manual 9    Initial Power On AXEL    This chapter describes the  Quick Set Up  feature and the  Auto Configuration   service     When the terminal is switched on up for the very first time two configuration  methods are available     Quick Set Up  a wizard allows the terminal to be set up in few seconds  for typical use     Auto Configuration  used in conjunction with AxRM  this function allows  the terminal to automatically receive new firmware and or a configuration     2 1   QUICK SET UP    This feature is automatically run when the AX3000 is powered up for the first  time or can be accessed at any time from the interactive set up  by pressing  Ctrl Alt Esc   Configuration   Quick set up       The quick set up is designed for a typical simple environment of     One server    An optional router    All sessions set identically    An optional printer     Note  After the           set up    is run all other parameters within the terminal 
216. s   Space    The  following box is displayed     Color for Black       Select one of the 8 emulation colors and press   Space   to select another color     6 1 5   Setting Up the Auto Signon Function    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Auto Signon  and press   Space    The  following box is displayed        This box allows a value to be entered for each parameter displayed within an  AS 400 Signon Screen      Username     Password  available only if  Username  is not empty   press   Space     to enter the password      Program Procedure  available only if  Username  is not empty       Menu  available only if  Username  is not empty       Current Library  available only if  Username  is not empty      Important  the auto signon function must be allowed at the OS 400 level  To    AX3000   User s Manual 149    Installing under OS 400 AXEL    enable it set the QRMTSIGN variable to  VERIFY  command                   6 1 6   Connection Properties    Within the  Session Profile    box  select  Connection Properties  and press    Space    The following box is displayed     No  No    1 5250    Space         These parameters are      TERM Value  terminal capabilities  Default value is IBM 3477 FC      Auto Connection  if this parameter is set to  yes   the connection will be  automatically established when the AX3000 is powered  Otherwise  the  user can press  lt Alt gt  lt Fx gt  to establish the connection      Auto Reconnection  if this parameter is set to  yes   a new conn
217. s  and Full speed  12 Mbits     Models 80  amp  85  high speed  480 Mbits     Maximal consumption  500 mA  total current draw for all ports     50 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    Important Note  power hungry non computing USB devices must not be  connected to the terminal  fans  lights     as they have the potential to draw too  much current and cause damage to the terminal     The following USB devices are supported     Keyboard     Barcode reader     Mouse     HUB     Printer     USB RS232 adaptor     Touch screen     Mass storage device  memory stick  hard drives  CD DVD readers         Smartcard reader  or security USB dongle from Aladdin      Audio device     Other USB devices are detected but not supported     USB devices are hot pluggable and are dynamically detected by the Axel  terminal     Maximum number of connected USB devices     Two keyboards and barcode readers     Two mice     Two HUBs     Four printers or USB RS232 adaptors     One touch screen     One mass storage device     Two smartcard readers     One audio device     3 4 2   Connecting a USB Keyboard  The USB keyboard is automatically detected by the Axel terminal   The USB keyboard settings  nationality  LED initialization     are displayed and           be changed in the AX3000   s General Parameters  For more information  see Chapter 3 2 1     AX3000   User s Manual 51    Interactive Set Up AXEL    Note  multiple keyboards  USB and or PS2  can be connected  The same  settings are 
218. s ASCII data to be sent to auxiliary  ports  serial  parallel      The possible values are     No    Yes  data can be encoded in decimal and hexadecimal notations    Yes  hexa  data is encoded only in hexadecimal notation     On Off ASCII Sequence  start and stop transparent mode sequence  For  more information see Chapter 6 2 5     b  Remapping 5250 Functions to any PC Keyboard keys    This allows any key to be remapped to any 5250 function and or character  string     Select  Key Mapping  within the  Session Profile  box and press  lt Space gt  to  display the following box     Key Mapping    CANCEL       Up to 20 sequences can be remapped  from  1 to  20      146 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 400    To program a new sequence  or to modify an existing one  select the sequence  number and press  lt Space gt   The following dialog box is displayed      Press  J  to open the com Press the key s  you want to program  OK    CANCEL       AX3000   User s Manual 147    Installing under OS 400 AXEL    Enter the keystroke to be remapped  Then enter a character string and or press   lt Down Arrow gt  to select through a list the associated 5250 function     Key Mapping    Enter  Key Mapping  1   lt Enter gt    Press  4  to open the command list     OK CLEAR       c  Palette    This allows default emulation colors to be remapped to any color     148 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 400    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Palette  and pres
219. s Prt5250 and LPD      6 1   5250 SCREEN SESSION  The IBM 5250 emulation type developed by Axel is IBM 3477 FC   This emulation provides all the features of an IBM 5250 terminal  Especially    Enhanced 5250 telnet protocol  TN5250E   compliant with the RFCs  1205 and 2877  terminal name negotiation  terminal type negotiation   etc       Color support       Screen sizes  80x24 and 132x27     5250 status line     6 1 1   Keyboard Type  a  Setting Up the Keyboard Type    The AX3000 supports both a 5250  122 keys  and a PC AT keyboard  102 105  keys   The keyboard type is not auto detected     To set the keyboard type  enter the AX3000 Set Up and select the    140 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 400     Configuration   Advanced   Tuning  menu  Set the  Keyboard Type  to  PC   or  AS400  F24   in the displayed box    Press  lt Alt gt  lt Rest gt  lt SetUp gt  to enter the AX3000 Set Up with an AS400  keyboard     b  In event of problems    If the AX3000 setting is not consistent  a PC keyboard is attached but a 5250  keyboard is declared  or vice versa   the keyboard won t work     A specific keystroke allows the keyboard type to be dynamically toggled  This  keystroke is  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt K gt  with a PC keyboard  and  lt Rest gt  lt Alt gt  lt K gt  with a  5250 keyboard     6 1 2   Setting a Session    To set a profile session  enter the AX3000 Set Up and select the   Configuration   Sessions   Session X  menu  where X is the session  number to be co
220. s are automatically updated with new  values     Customized  the three parameters are independent from general  settings     Two VNC terminals may be used to support a double width display  The   Double Screen  parameter allows the mode of each terminal to be set     No  no double screen support    Left Part  this terminal displays the left side of the large virtual screen   The  Shared Session    option is forced to  Yes   See next sub section     Right Part  this terminal displays the right side of the large virtual screen   The  Shared Session    and  Keyboard and Mouse Ignored    options are  forced to  Yes   See next sub section     c  Additional Parameters    Within the    Session Profile    box  select    Additional Parameters  and press    AX3000   User s Manual 207    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL     lt Space gt   The following box is displayed     Protocol    No  Operating Mode   No  Keyboard   Local   Caps Lock   Standard    Enabled  Standard    Yes  Yes  High       These parameters are      Preferred Encoding  the  encoding  is the data format used by the VNC  server to send graphical data to the terminal  Supported encodings are      Hextile  original encoding supported by all VNC server versions     ZRLE  newer and higher performing encoding but is only  supported by a RealVNC server V4  In addition  ZRLE graphical  data may be compressed      Hextile Cache  when this parameter is disabled  display updates are  directly done on the screen itself  Else a disp
221. s mode  The 3270 status line is  set in reverse video mode and the following information is displayed   the 12 boxes are the 12 function keys  a solid box means that data is  recorded                 OOOO OOOO 17 21    2  Press the recorded function key  from  lt F1 gt  to  lt F12 gt    The 3270 status  line is set in normal mode and the following information is displayed  the       symbol indicates the Process mode   The key sequence is  processed           P 17 21       Note  during the process mode  the input is inhibited     7 3   3270 PRINTER    Auxiliary ports  2 serial and 1 parallel  and logical ports  USB and TCP  are  provided by the AX3000  These ports are independently controlled so multiple  printers can be attached to the AX3000     These printers can be controlled by one of two protocols      Prt3270  a printer controlled by this service is seen as a standard  spooled system printer device      LPD  this service  RFCs 1048 and related  is provided as a standard  feature by major operating systems  Unix Linux  NT  etc    The main  benefit of this protocol is an LPD printer can be shared by different  operating systems     This chapter describes only the Prt3270 protocol     180 AX3000   User s Manual       AXEL Installing under OS 390    To set the Prt3270 service  enter the AX3000 Set Up and select   Configuration   Aux  Ports   xxx      In the displayed box  set the  Associated Service  to  Prt3270   then select  Net  Service Parameters  and press  lt Space gt
222. s name low encryption level is a satisfactory security level in  most cases  Within Servere Terminal communication  only data sent by the  terminal is critical  password  confidential code  etc   The unencrypted data sent  from the server is the physical screen display  i e  colored pixels and not text     To modify the encryption level  within the  RDP Tcp Properties  box  click on the   General  tab  The following information is displayed   Propri  t  s de RDP Tcp  2  x     Remote Control   Client Settings   Network Adapter   Permissions    General Logon Settings   Sessions   Environment    5    RDP Tep       Type  Microsoft RDP 5 0    Transport       cp  Comment  0    Encryption    Encryption level    Low        Only the data sent from the client to the server is protected by  encryption based on the server s standard key strength  The data  sent from the server to the client is not protected              Use standard Windows authentication       Annuler   Appliquer      Set the  Encryption level    parameter to  Low    Medium  or  High    b  ICA Protocol  The available encryption levels are      None     Basic level      RC5     To modify the encryption level  within the  ICA Tcp Properties  box  click on the    124 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows     General  tab  The same dialog box than RDP protocol is displayed   Set the  Encryption level  parameter to  None  or  Basic      5 5 2   Automatic Logon    Information required for logon  username  do
223. s not compressed     The display and printer data flows are multiplexed by TCP IP     There is no requirement for any terminal sessions to be connected    Printer data compression is not possible    RDP ICA Protocol   Client level printer     The printer is automatically created when the session is established     AX3000   User s Manual 133    Installing under Windows AXEL      The printer name is static   terminal name   printer name   session X   the  session number can varied       The printer is only available when the session is established  This printer  is the user default printer  This printer is not  seen  by other users      The printer dataflow can be compressed      The display and printer data flows are multiplexed by TSE     The following applies only with LPD printer configuration  For an RDP printer  see Chapter 5 1 5 and for an ICA see Chapter 5 2 6     5 7 1   Setting Up the AX3000    To set the LPD service on the terminal port  select the  Configuration   Ports  aux    xxx   yyy  dialog and enter the following parameters     Associated Service  select            Net Service Parameters  press   Space   to access the following dialog  box     No     lt Space gt          Printer Port Name  this is the port identifier  Sometimes the same  name is used for the printer at the operating system level      NLZCR   NL Filter  set to  no       Enhanced parameters  see Appendix A 10 3      Pre print String  normally not used      Post print String  normally not used   
224. s trailer label is missing  from the configuration file used to set up an  AX3000  the fatal error message ERR 103 will be issued in response to the  rsh command and the default factory set up will be reloaded     A 6   SETTING UP AXEL DHCP OPTIONS    In addition to the standard options  IP addresses  DNS server      the DHCP  server can be used to communicate manufacturer specific information  this  allows to set  Axel DHCP options       For example  Axel s auto configuration feature  see chapter 2 1  requires the  terminal to know the network location of the machine running the management  tool  AxRM   This information can be given to terminals using this DHCP  feature     A 6 1   Overview  A DHCP server has various options numbered as follows     From 1 to 223  reserved options  For example  option 3 gives the list of    routers and 15 lists DNS servers     From 224 to 254  private options  Available for manufacturers use     284 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    The Axel options are contained within the range of numbers from 231 to 240   The    type    is always    character string     The format of the entry is as follows      Entry starts with a keyword followed by one or more parameters      The symbol     is used as separator         In contrast to some implementations Axel uses a    keyword    rather than a  specific number  The actual number  231 to 240  is irrelevant so any non   conflicting number in this range can be used    For more information on the A
225. ser s Manual    AXEL Using the AX3000    4 1 1   Session Manager  Classic Mode    This is the appearance of the classic mode     Copyright AXEL       The following information is displayed for each session     The associated keystroke  For example  lt Alt F1 gt     The session label  For example  1 TSE  or  2 5250      The server     To open a session the user presses the associated keystrokes     AX3000   User s Manual 75    Using the AX3000 AXEL    4 1 2   Session Manager  Desktop Mode    This is the appearance of the Desktop Mode        The following information is displayed for each session     An icon    The indicator and the session label  For example  1 TSE  or  2 5250      Note  whatever the status line settings  with the session manager the status line  is always displayed     Possible actions     Click the icon to open a session   The associated keystroke is also  available   See Table 1     Click a status line icon  See Table 2     76 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Using the AX3000       Table 1   session type icons         z    o  amp     TSE Citrix Citrix Virtual Virtual  Published App  Published App  Desktop Desktop  Published Svr  Desktop  XEN   VMWARE    v            Ye   VNC 5250 3270 Text   Emulation    Table 2   status line icons    Turning off   See Chapter 4 5   Getting terminal information  Firmware Hardware   Disconnecting the current session  See Chapter 4 2 2    USB drive status  Only displayed if a USB drive is attached   Set Portrait Landscape mode 
226. ser s Manual 47    Interactive Set Up AXEL    Note  If  Choose Portrait Landscape  is enabled  see Appendix A 10 2   the  parameter  Pre hardcopy String  is replaced by the two parameters  Portrait  Pre print String  and  Landscape Pre print String     b  Regional Option   These two options allow numbers to be distinguished when a copy paste  operation is done from a text based session to an RDP ICA session   Useful  when the paste operation is done to spreadsheet software      The decimal symbol can be a comma or a dot     The digit grouping symbol can be a dot  a comma or a space     3 3   SETTING EACH SESSION    The AX3000 s built in multi connection capability allows simultaneous access to  up to 6 different servers on one or more Ethernet networks or by serial  connection     Each independent session has       A connection  TCP IP protocol and associated server    A virtual terminal  emulation  function key values  number of lines  etc    48 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    Select the  Configuration   Sessions   Session X  menu  where X is the  session number   The  Session Type  list is displayed     Configuration Diagnostics Download       Network  Terminal  Sessions Local Desktop    n a a a Session TSE             Session Citrix           rinse ehe Ll ha Session Virtual Desktop  Session UNC  SSS  gt     SSS    Session 5250  Session 3270  Text Emulation  None    Note  if the session was already associated with a  Session Type  the related  dialog bo
227. sion     Dynamic allocation of pseudo terminals  ptty      System access is controlled by a  login   which is generated by the telnetd  daemon     The value of the TERM environment variable is negotiated after the login  stage   See Chapter 8 1 8 for default TERM values      AX3000   User s Manual 185    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    b  The TTY Protocol    The tty server is an Axel proprietary protocol  Additional software is required   see Chapter 8 4      Main characteristics of a tty session     Pre defined allocation of pseudo terminals  ptty      UNIX access is controlled by a  login   which is generated by the init  daemon  controlled by the  etc inittab file      The Unix Linux host must run the AXEL tty server daemon  axttyd   The  configuration file axttyd must contain a list of AX3000 sessions and the pttys  associated with each     Each session is identified by the name of the AX3000  from the  etc hosts file   and a special keyword  sessx where x is the session number   For example     sessl  dev ptyp12  dev ttyp12    sess2  dev ptyp13  dev ttyp13  sess2  dev ptyp2  dev ttyp2       A terminal session controlled by the tty server acts as a serial terminal attached  to a multi I O board  The  etc inittab file must therefore be modified to launch  the getty command for each pseudo terminal    Example for SCO Unix  get a login on  dev ttyp12    This modification will take effect after invoking the following command       init q   CR      For more information abo
228. sion  only for TSE and Citrix sessions where USB Mass  Storage is supported     2 1 4   Citrix Published Application Desktop    For session type  Citrix           and connection type    Published App  Desktop     the  following box is displayed     Logon Authentication   lt Space gt     Browser Settings       These parameters are     Username  default value for logon authentication  optional      Password  press  lt Space gt  to enter the logon password     Domain  default value for logon authentication     IP Address or DNS Name  location of a farm s server    Port TCP  used by the exploration  browser  protocol    AX3000   User s Manual 15    Initial Power On AXEL    2 1 5   Citrix  Published Application or Published Server     For the session type  Citrix  ica   with the connection type  Published Application   or  Published Server   the following box is displayed  after the terminal reboots      Citrix    Published Application    TCP IP   HTTP       These parameters are     Connection Type  Selected in previous dialog box     Exploration Protocol  possible values are     TCP IP   HTTP  XML based exploration    TCP IP  UDP based exploration    TCP Port  used by the exploration protocol    IP Address or DNS Name  location of a server farm  overwrite default of     ica    if necessary    Published Application or Published Server  press  lt F2 gt  to show the  list from the Citrix farm     2 1 6   Serial Connection  Note  Depending on model  if an AUX1 port is available on th
229. sktop   See Chapter 5 4 2     Browser Settings  press the spacebar to select browser settings  see  chapter 5 4 2     Connection Properties  press the spacebar to display the    Enhanced  Parameters    dialog box  See chapter 5 2 8      Auto Logon  press  lt Space gt  to show a dialog box permitting the user   s  name  password and domain to be entered  This removes the need to  enter these details for every logon  See Chapter 5 4 4     Display Parameters  press  lt Space gt  to set display settings  resolution  and colors   For more information  see Chapter 5 2 3      Available Desktop Menu  press  lt Space gt  to customize the dialog box  where virtual desktop list will be displayed  For more information  see  Chapter 5 4 3     116 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows      Additional Parameters  pressing  lt Space gt  displays a dialog box  which  lets certain parameters be changed  connection name  time zone      If  the  Connection Type  is  VMWARE VDM   see Chapter 5 1 3  otherwise  see Chapter 5 2 4      Redirected Resources  press   Space   to set redirected resources   printers  COM ports  etc    For more information  see Chapter 5 2 6      Bandwidth  pressing   Space    displays a dialog box  which lets certain  parameters be changed  If the  Connection Type  is  VMWARE VDM    see Chapter 5 1 6  Else see Chapter 5 2 7     Note  after saving changes power cycle the AX3000   5 4 2   Connection Type and Browser Settings  a  Connection Types  For a vir
230. src2 E cx   associate envelope                associate ascii99          associate wscstna      ws  associate wscstlib           associate transp               associate transp seq                 lt    lt    lt    lt  1 lt    lt    lt    lt  lt    lt  1 lt  IS   lt    lt   S ISS   lt    lt    lt  1  STR   lt     AX3000   User s Manual          275    Appendix AXEL    Terminal Parameters    term_encrypted_password   term_password   term_language    term screen CRT standard  term defaultc geometry   term default  depth    term setup mode graphic  term sessman color    term sessman mode desktop  term screensaver yes   term screensaver energystar no    term scr       nsaver delay 2  term screensaver enpassword   term screensaver password        term keyboard french       term hotkeys enable yes  term numlock on   term capslock on   term local beep long       term remote beep long       term keydelay mediun   term keyspeed low   term audio volume 5   term audio beep By Buzzer  term mscclick inverted no  term mouse speed   term defaultport auxl    term preprint string    term postprint string   term touchscr type ELO  term touchscr  port usbl          term touchscr xlow 0    276    character string  15 char max      character string  15 char max    french      CRT standard      english   TFT   resolution format     8bpp   16         24bpp   graphic   text          classic      yes   yes kbd only       yes     number lower than 31     character string  15 char max      character st
231. ssible     Entering the password to unlock the screen  Two passwords can be  used  the screen saver password and the set up password  see Chapter  3 2 7      Resetting the AX3000  If the password is forgotten  the only way is  selecting the  Shutdown  button  After power cycling it  the AX3000  administrator will be able to modify or remove the screen saver  password     Note  For the highest level of security we recommend setting the terminals    Set   Up    password   See Chapter 3 2 7     4 4    COPY PASTE  FUNCTION    The terminal offers a  Copy Paste  function which operates either in the current  session or between different sessions     For example  text can be copied from a 5250 session and pasted to a Windows  session     AX3000   User s Manual 79    Using the AX3000 AXEL    a  Copy  From a Windows Session  RDP or ICA      Use the standard  Copy  function  For example   Ctrl     C      From a VNC Session   The  vncconfig  tool must be run  The copy is simply done by selecting a text  zone     From a Text Session  5250  3270  ANSI  VT      Press  lt Ctrl gt  lt C gt   with 5250 and 3270 emulations  or  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt C gt   with    other emulations  to enter the Copy mode  Use the mouse to select the copy  data  Pressing   Enter   validates the selection and the text is copied into a local  clipboard     Esc   cancels Copy Mode     Note  the Copy function is available only if the mouse is supported by the  current session     Note  We are unable to use the 
232. stalling under Windows    General ICA Session Information      A new ICA connection becomes the current session     The Citrix server hosting this session is localized with the browser  parameters      The ICA session uses the general operational parameters specified in the  set up  encoding  bandwidth          The screen resolution and number of colors for all published applications  is set by the Citrix server for that application  If the resolution is not  available or is incorrect the desktop resolution is used     c  Closing the Desktop  The    Key    icon is used to shutdown the desktop  All applications must first be    closed before the Desktop can be shutdown  If any applications are still open  when shutdown is attempted the terminal will emit a beep and not shutdown     AX3000   User s Manual 115    Installing under Windows AXEL    5 4   VIRTUAL DESKTOP SESSION    5 4 1   Setting Up an Virtual Desktop Session    To set a Virtual Desktop session  enter the AX3000 Set Up and select the   Configuration   Sessions   Session X  menu  where X is the session  number to be configured   The following box is displayed     Connection Parameters  Virtual Desktop  UMWARE UDM   lt Space gt    lt Space gt    lt Space gt     Desktop Parameters     lt Space gt    lt Space gt    lt Space gt    lt Space gt    lt Space gt        Set the following parameters      Session Type  select  Virtual Desktop     Connection Type  press  lt Space gt  to select the  VMWARE VDM  or   Citrix Xen De
233. sts the available AX3000 administration commands     ax_reboot Rebooting the AX3000   Example  rsh ax3000 ax_reboot  password   More information  chapter 10 4    ax sinit Resetting an AX3000 resource  screen session or aux  port   Example  rsh ax3000 ax sinit  password  sess1    setup get Requesting the AX3000 Set Up   Example  rsh ax3000 setup get  gt  file  More information  chapter 10 4    setup send Setting up the AX3000 through a text file   Example  rsh ax3000 setup send  password     file  More information  chapter 10 4   ax download                        an AX3000 firmware downloading   Example  rsh ax3000 ax download  password  192 1 1 1 file  More information  chapter 11   Requesting the AX3000 firmware revision   Example  rsh ax3000 ax version   ax getstat Requesting the AX3000 statistics   Example  rsh ax3000 ax getstat  More information  chapter 9 3    Note  these commands are also available with uppercase characters   ax version and AX VERSION are the same command         A 9   FIRMWARE DOWNLOADING  BOOTP AND TFTP     Firmware can be downloaded  for example to add or improve AX3000 features   Note  this chapter is dedicated to experts and dealt only with TFTP and BOOTP  protocols  Generally a firmware downloaded via a free Windows administration  utility  AxRM or Axel Remote Management   See Chapter 10 1     Firmware can be downloaded in one of two ways     tftp protocol  the operator must enter the location of the firmware file     AX3000   User s Manual 289  
234. t    Solution  use the correct keyword  setup send  setup get or    ax reboot      ERR 106  cmos busy        Command  setup send   Cause  another command  setup get or setup send  is running  or  another user has entered set up from the target terminals  keyboard    Consequence  no effect    Solution  Either wait for a few seconds and repeat the command  or  arrange for the other user to exit set up on the target  AX3000     242 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Remote Administration       ERR 113  password required    Command  setup_send  ax_reboot and ax_download   Cause  the AX3000 Interactive Set Up is password protected  This  password hasn t be specified within the command    Consequence  no effect    Solution  use the right password        ERR 114  invalid password    Command  setup_send  ax_reboot and ax_download   Cause  the AX3000 Interactive Set Up is password protected  This  right password hasn t be specified within the command    Consequence  no effect    Solution  use the right password     b  Warning Error Messages    Warning error messages do not stop the command but indicate a problem  such  as a syntax error   The following warnings may occur        ERR 201  xxx  unknown parameter name     Command  setup_send  Cause  the set up parameter  xxx  is unknown    e g   sl1_screencolumn instead of s1_screen_column    Consequence  the set up parameter is ignored  The current value of this  parameter is retained   Solution  check the spelling of the set up parameter  A
235. t  check the tftp package is already installed  The tftp protocol works through  the xinetd daemon  Check if xinetd is running  If not  enable xinetd     A file    tftp    should be present in  etc xinetd d  This file contains the tftp server  settings  Check the content of the file is as shown below     service tftp     socket_type  protocol  wait  user   root    server    usr sbin in tftpd    server args      disable no       Reboot if you modified any of these settings   c  OS 400    The TFTP protocol is available as a standard feature on OS 400  but must be  correctly set to match with the AX3000 requirements     1   Create a directory        gt  CRTDIR DIR  axfirm    2   Copy the firmware file  for example ax3000  on  axfirm     3   Change the directory   axfirm  QTFTP user s rights         gt  CHGAUT OBJ   axfirm   USER QTFTP  DTAAUT  RX  OBJAUT   NONE     AX3000   User s Manual 291    Appendix AXEL    4   Change the file   axfirm ax3000  QTFTP user s rights       gt  CHGAUT OBJ   axfirm ax3000   USER QTFTP  DTAAUT  RX  OBJAUT   NONE     5   User s right can be checked by invoking        gt  WRKLNK OBJ   axfirm            gt  WRKLNK OBJ    axfirm ax3000      6   Change the default TFTP directory    gt  CHGTFTPA ALTSRCDIR   axfirm      7   Stop and restart the TFTP server     gt  ENDTCPSVR  TFTP      gt  STRICPSVR  TFTP     Then download the firmware from the AX3000 interactive set up  see next  chapter      A 9 2   Downloading by TFTP Protocol    To download firmware us
236. t Space gt  to select the server from the list     Connection Properties  pressing  lt Space gt  displays a dialog box which  allows certain connection parameters to be changed   See Chapter 8 1 8      Display Parameters  press  lt Space gt  to set display settings  For more  information  see Chapter 8 1 4     Additional Parameters  pressing  lt Space gt  displays a dialog box which  allows certain emulation parameters to be changed   See Chapter 8 1 5     Editing Keyboard table  pressing  lt Space gt  displays a dialog box which  allows certain keys to be remapped   See Chapter 8 1 5     Key Mapping  pressing  lt Space gt  displays a dialog box which allows all  of the keys to be remapped   See Chapter 8 1 5      Coloring mode  this function allows monochrome applications to be  displayed in color   See Chapter 8 1 6      Palette  pressing  lt Space gt  displays a dialog box which lets colors to be  remapped   See Chapter 8 1 5     Save and exit  The AX3000 is ready for use     8 1 2   Protocols  telnet  tty  ssh  ssh2 or aux1 aux2    Connecting a character based session can be done     Either in TCP IP mode via telnet  tty or ssh protocols    Or in serial mode  RS232  by using a serial port  Aux1  Aux2        a  The TELNET Protocol    The telnet server is a standard module of the Unix Linux TCP IP stack  The  AX3000 can immediately open a client telnet session  without any additional  software or alteration to the Unix Linux settings     Main characteristics of a telnet ses
237. t for the  current session     If this parameter is set to  yes  a new connection is immediately and  automatically established within the current session     If this parameter is set to  no   the AX3000 displays the first of the remaining  active sessions  If there are no remaining active sessions  for example     because the last active view has been disconnected   the session manager is  displayed     4 3   LOCKING THE SCREEN    For security reasons  it might be useful for the AX3000 operator to lock the  screen rather than logging out     Note  the lock screen means the AX3000 screen is blanked but the current    78 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Using the AX3000    sessions are still connected and active  There is no way to enter the AX3000  Set Up or to switch the session  The only way to regain control is to enter the  proper password     The lock screen feature is associated with the screen saver function and must  be enabled through the AX3000 Set Up  see Chapter 3 2 2      Two methods are available to lock a screen      Automatically  when the terminal is idle  keyboard or screen  for a  certain time  the AX300 blacks out the monitor display  The display is  automatically restored as soon as a key is pressed  A dialog box allowing  the screen to be unlocked after password is entered is displayed      Manually  the  lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt S gt  keystroke allows the screen to be locked  immediately     An unlock screen dialog box is displayed  Two operations are po
238. t for the required session the  Enhanced Mode   parameter to  Yes   See Chapter 8 1 5     8 1 8   Connection Properties    Within the  Session Profile    box  select  Connection Properties  and press   lt Space gt   The following box is displayed      lt Space gt        200 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    These parameters are       TERM Value  telnet and ssh protocols   The value of this environment  variable is  negotiated   between the host and the AX3000  The following  table shows the default values according to the emulations     ADDS VP 60       TERM    ansi  ansi  AT386  hft c old  AT386 ie  linux  vt220  Vt52  wyse 60  viewpoint  viewpoint60  Ibm3151  ansi  ansi  ansi       Emulation TERM  XENIX SCO    ANSI DATA GENERAL  ANSI INTERACTIVE AT386                ATO300  PRISM  REAL 32                   THEOS  OS2 POLYMOD2  SM94xx  TWIN SERVER  PROLOGUE 3 pri3  TVI 950  QVT119                            C332 C332      Auto Connection  if this parameter is set to  yes   the connection will be  automatically established when the AX3000 is powered  Otherwise  the  user can press   Alt     Fx   to establish the connection      Auto Reconnection  if this parameter is set to  yes   a new connection is  automatically established after a disconnection  Otherwise  the user can  press   Alt     Fx   to establish    new connection      Session Label  this character string  11 characters max   is used to  identify the session within the session manger or 
239. t per Screen Type    File   etc inittab  Num Resolution Bits   Pixel Auto Run   1         2 1280  1024 16  N   3 1024  752 16   4  5   6     y a                                 Exitand Save             Two methods are available      One VNC Server per Terminal  when Linux is started  one Xvnc daemon  per terminal is run  Each terminal will establish a connection to  its  Xvnc  daemon  identified by a different TCP port     The main benefit is after an incident  network or other   the terminal will  retrieve the lost session    In addition with this method  the logon screen may be skipped and  replaced by any application  Firefox for example       One TCP Port per Screen Type  an Xvnc daemon is run only when a   VNC terminal opens a connection  The TCP port depends on both the  resolution and the number of colors   This mechanism is similar to telnet or SSH  all terminals can use the  same TCP port but in event of problem the lost session can t be retrieved   The benefit is saving resources  the number of running Xvnc daemons is  the number of terminals currently in use     Note  the two methods may be hosted on the same Linux server     212 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    Click the tab corresponding to the preferred method and add VNC terminals    The Linux server will be rebooted for modifications take effect     8 3   CONTROLLING PRINTERS    Auxiliary ports  2 serial and 1 parallel   logical USB ports and network printer  ports are provided by 
240. t reachable   firmware file found  etc      Note  error messages can also be displayed  connection timed out for  example   For explanations refer to UNIX manuals     For more information about the download process  see Chapter A 9 4    AX3000   User s Manual 295    Appendix AXEL    b  Downloading Through Set Up    Enter AX3000 Set Up   lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Esc gt   and select the  Download  menu   Set the Protocol parameter to bootp  When the  OK  button is selected  the  download operation begins     For more information about the download process  see Chapter A 9 4   A 9 4   The Download Process    During the download operation  the following messages are displayed on the  AX3000 monitor     a  The bootp Stage    AX BOOTP   1 1    Flash Key 3    If a response is received to the bootp broadcast request  information about the  firmware file location will be displayed     AX3000 IP  192 168 1 242  bootp server name  vangogh  bootp relay IP  0 0 0 0    tftp server IP  192 1 1 254    file name   axel firm  tftp router IP  192 168 1 252       AX BOOTP   1 1    Flash Key 3    Next  an automatic connection to the tftp host will then be made  in order to  download the firmware file     b  The tftp Stage    AX TFTP   1 1    Flash Key 3    296 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix    If the download can be performed  the current firmware is erased and the  following message is displayed on the AX3000 monitor     Then  the selected firmware file is downloaded  each dot represen
241. t the new IP address the terminal must be  pinged a multiple times     Using under Unix Linux     Run the following command to associate the AX3000 s Ethernet address  XX XX XX XX XX XX with the IP address a b c d  this command updates the ARP    AX3000   User s Manual 287       Appendix AXEL    table        arp  s a b c d XX XX XX XX XX XX       Run a ping command       ping a b c d    The first ping requests are not acknowledged  But after few seconds the  AX3000 is rebooted and replies the ping requests  The AX3000 is now set with  the a b c d IP address     Using under Windows         Windows administration s w  AxRM or Axel Remote Management  is  available free on the Axel Web site  See Chapter 8 8 2     The procedure is the same as Unix Linux except for the Ethernet address  notation      are used as separators instead of       The command is     QUAD arp ss        XX XX XX OXX XX xX    Run one or more ping commands  4 ping requests are sent by ping command      CAD ping 8 b c d    Note  if required this function can be disabled by setting the  IP Addr  Set by  Ping  parameter to  no   For more information  refer to Appendix A 10 6     A 8   RSH ADMINISTRATION COMMAND LIST    Several administration commands are offered by the AX3000  These  commands are launched by using a remote administration command  rsh for  example  which is available as standard features from most major operating  Systems     288 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Appendix       The following table li
242. t up  for more information  see Appendix A 1        lt Arrows gt   moving selection within menus or dialog boxes      lt Enter gt   validating a value or a button      lt Esc gt   cancels current field same as selecting  cancel  button       Space    open a list of options       Tab    short cut to buttons at the bottom of the dialog box       Ctrl     C    copy a character string or session settings       Ctrl     V    paste information    26 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    3 1   SETTING NETWORK ENVIRONMENT    The network settings are available through the  Configuration   Network   menu     Configuration Diagnostics Download    Network General Parameters  Terminal Ethernet Interface  gt   IP Parameters  Sessions Servers State    Advanced    Quick Set Up       This chapter covers the AX3000 network configuration    General Parameters  the terminal identification and the interface  activation    Ethernet Interface  static or dynamic IP address  DNS protocol and  router management    Servers  manages the server list     Note  more information is given in the following appendices     Appendix A 2  Ethernet addresses  IP addresses  net masks and routers     Appendix A 3  DHCP protocol     Appendix A 4  DNS protocol     AX3000   User s Manual 27    Interactive Set Up AXEL    3 1 1   General Parameters    To set the AX3000 interface and the terminal identification select the   Configuration   Network   General Parameters  menu  The dialog box  below is display
243. tart or stop the printer      162 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 400    6 4   REMOTE ADMINISTRATION   6 4 1   Remote Control   This functionality allows an administrator to remotely take control of a terminal   The administrator can passively watch the users screen or actively take control  with his own keyboard for various support or administration purposes    For more information refer to Chapter 10 2     6 4 2   Other Functions        A Windows administration utility  AxRM or Axel Remote Management  is  available free on the Axel Web site  See Chapter 10 1     The following commands allow an AX3000 to be controlled over the network   Note  most of the following examples describe the OS 400 command                      but remote administration commands can also be invoked with a  Unix Linux or a Windows command  rsh      a  Rebooting the AX3000    To reboot an AX3000 over the network  invoke the following command       gt  RUNRMTCMD CMD   AX_REBOOT password   RMTLOCNAME  192 168 1 241   IP     Where    AX REBOOT   Command for AX3000 reboot     password   Specify the set up password if set       192 168 1 241   AX3000 IP address   b  Resetting an AX3000 resource  screen session or aux  port   The reset feature allows       To stop and restart the associated network service    To apply new serial line settings  data transfer rate  handshake  etc       AX3000   User s Manual 163    Installing under OS 400 AXEL    The supported resources are     Screen sess
244. tem is very busy    the host system detects an error condition   t Upper Shift  lt Shift gt  is currently pressed   A Caps Lock The keyboard is in Caps Lock mode     Insert The insert mode is enabled   lt Inser gt  key       Diacritic Mode   This symbol is displayed when the diacritic mode is  enabled  This mode is automatically set when a  composed character is currently entered      e          R Record The  Record  mode is set  see Chapter 6 2 3    P Process The  Process  mode is set  see Chapter 6 2 3    LL CC   Cursor LL and CC indicate the row and column where the  Locator cursor is located          AX3000   User s Manual    151       Installing under OS 400 AXEL    6 2 2   Using the Keyboard    Two types of keyboard can be used with the AX3000  a PC AT  102 105 key  or  a 5250  122 key  keyboard  The following tables list the 5250 functions and the    Axel functions  entering the set up  etc  accessed from these keyboard     5250 Functions                                                                                                     5250 Functions 5250 Keyboard PC AT Keyboard  Attention  lt Attn gt   lt Esc gt  or  lt Alt Gr gt  lt Pause gt   Back tabulation  lt   gt  or  lt Shift gt  lt      gt     lt Shift gt  lt Tab gt   Clear end of field  lt Erlnp gt   lt End gt   Clear all fields  lt Alt gt  lt Clear gt   lt Pause gt   Cursor shape  Ch  6 1 3   lt              gt   lt Alt Gr gt  lt F11 gt   Duplication  lt Dup gt   lt Shift gt  lt Insert gt   Enter  lt Enter 
245. ter can be replaced by the Euro symbol within  the current character set  use the decimal notation         Scroll Lock    amp    Pause    enable or disable these two keys     lt   gt   numpad   the two available values are the dot     and the comma         Backspace Mode  the two available values are     Standard  move cursor left    Suppress  deleting the character on the left of the cursor location    Column Separator  the two possible values are      No  this video attribute is not displayed      Yes  this video attribute is displayed  but due to VGA limitations  it  is displayed as underlining      Rulers Style  the  rule  function allows the cursor to be located easily  among other characters  Three types of rules are available      Cross  a horizontal line and a vertical line indicate the cursor  location      Horizontal  a horizontal line is displayed at the cursor line      Vertical  a vertical line is displayed at the cursor column    Press   Rule   or   Alt Gr gt  lt F12 gt  with a PC keyboard  to enable disable  the rule function from a 5250 session     Behavior  two values     Follows the cursor     Fixed     Mouse Allowed  enable disable the mouse within this session    Local Windowing  this parameter sets the window display mode  Two  values     No  windows are displayed with the original characters      and          Yes  windows are displayed with  real  frames     AX3000   User s Manual 145    Installing under OS 400 AXEL      Transparent Mode  this mode allow
246. terminal   The administrator can passively watch the users screen or actively take control  with his own keyboard for various support or administration purposes    For more information refer to Chapter 10 2     7 4 2   Other Functions    The remote administration command is rsh  or rexec   This command is  available with most of operating systems         A Windows administration utility  AxRM or Axel Remote Management  is  available free on the Axel Web site  See Chapter 10 1     182 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX       INSTALLING UNDER UNIX LINUX    AX3000   User s Manual 183    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    This chapter covers AX3000 installation under Unix Linux     8 1   TEXT MODE SESSION  TCP IP OR SERIAL MODE     8 1 1   Setting a Session Profile    To set the profile of a session  enter the AX3000 Set Up and select the   Configuration   Sessions   Session X  menu  where X is the session  number to be configured   The following box is displayed     Session 1 Profile    Connection Parameters  Text Emulation  ANSI  telnet  no server   lt Space gt   Session Parameters   lt Space gt    lt Space gt    lt Space gt    lt Space gt   Disabled     lt Space gt     CANCEL       These parameters are     Session Type  select  Text Emulations      Emulation  see Chapter 8 1 3    184 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX      Protocol  select  telnet    tty    ssh    ssh2    aux1 or  aux2    See Chapter  8 1 2      Server  press  l
247. the AX3000  These ports are independently controlled so  multiple printers can be attached to the AX3000     A printer is generally controlled by a network service      tty protocol  this is an Axel proprietary protocol  A printer controlled by  the tty protocol is seen as a local printer      LPD protocol  this service  RFCs 1048 and related  is provided as a  standard feature by major operating systems  Unix Linux  Windows  etc     The main benefit of this protocol is an LPD printer can be shared by  different operating systems     rsh command  this command allows the contents of a file to be  redirected over the network     In addition  a printer can also be controlled in  transparent mode   by embedded  escape sequences  like a printer attached to a serial terminal      The following covers the tty protocol  the rsh command and the transparent  mode  For more information about LPD printers  refer to Appendix A 3     8 3 1   The tty Protocol    The tty server is an Axel proprietary protocol  An additional piece of software is  needed  see Chapter 8 4      The Unix Linux host must run the AXEL tty server daemon  axttyd   The    configuration file axttyd must contain a list of AX3000 auxiliary ports and the  pttys associated with each     AX3000   User s Manual 213    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    Each auxiliary port using the tty protocol  see Chapter 3 5 4  is identified by the  name of the AX3000  from the  etc hosts file  and a special keyword  For  example     aux
248. the AX3000 set up  multi shell views  are referred to as   pages per session   or   page session        The AX3000 default factory set up is 6 telnet sessions and 1 page session     To change this configuration  enter AX3000 Set Up   lt Ctrl gt  lt Alt gt  lt Esc gt   and  tune the number of sessions and number of Pages Session parameters     c  Using the Multi Shell  To run tcpmsh  the syntax is     tcpmsh   options    CR    The main tcpmsh options are     b  selecting generic names of pseudo terminals       b 0  default   using ttypx  x is any decimal value from 0 to 63     b 1  using ttypx  x is any hexadecimal value from 0 to 3Fhex      AX3000   User s Manual 203    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL     b 2  using ttypx  ttyqx  ttyrx and ttysx  x is any hexadecimal value  from 0 to F           a different overscan color is associated with each view     f file  initial commands  This command file has a maximum of eight lines   Each line lists the command associated with one view  If a view does not  have an initial command  its associated line must start with a dash  character  2Dhex character      h  online help     L label  each view is associated with the character string  label n   is n is  the view number  This label is displayed on the TCP IP status line         the line 25 acts as a status line which specifies the active session and  the number of declared views      m  silent mode     n nbr  maximum number of view  default 2       p file  fixed set of ttyp  This fil
249. the following values    Session Type  select  Citrix  ica      Connection Type  select  Published App  Desktop     110 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows     ICA Browser Settings  press the spacebar to select browser settings    See Chapter 5 2 2       Connection Properties  press the spacebar to display the    Enhanced  Parameters    dialog box  See chapter 5 2 8      Logon Authentication  press spacebar to show a dialog box permitting  the user s name  password and domain to be entered  This removes the  need to enter these details for every logon     Desktop Parameters  press spacebar to show a tuning box  See  Chapter 5 3 2      Number of Sessions  this sets the number of sessions reserved for  published applications on the  Published App  Desktop  session     The following parameters are used dynamically by ICA to set up the  published applications       Additional Parameters  press spacebar to show dialog box to set further  settings  See chapter 5 2 4      Redirected Resources  press  lt Space gt  to set redirected resources   printers  COM ports  etc    For more information  see Chapter 5 2 6      Bandwidth  press spacebar to show dialog box for bandwidth  management settings  See chapter 5 2 7     Notes     After changing setup parameters it is necessary to reboot the terminal to  ensure the new values are used    Once  Published App  Desktop  is setup the reserved sessions are  inaccessible from the setup menus     The setting up of a  Published
250. tings this  parameter may be ignored  The AX3000 automatically renews the lease  when it expires     Free IP address when shutdown  by default when the terminal is  shutdown a command to release the IP address is sent to the DHCP  server  Set this option to  no  to change that      Client Identifier  allows the terminal to be identified not only by the  Ethernet address  useful to control IP address assignment    VINCENT        don   t understand this but is doesn   t sound right     User Class Identifier  allows the DHCP server to assign settings in  regards of a class of device     Trace Mode  in the event of problems this mode allows the data  exchanged between the AX3000 and the DHCP server to be displayed  on the screen  The trace data is displayed directly on the AX3000 screen   i e  messages may    pollute    the AX3000 display at any time       Check IP Address  the AX3000 checks its allocated IP address is not  already in use     b  DNS Protocol  To resolve a name  the AX3000 sends DNS requests to a DNS server  The IP  address of this DNS server must be known  The AX3000 set up procedure    allows two DNS servers to be entered     Note  if  DNS Servers  is selected the  DHCP Option List  these two parameters  are supplied by DHCP and cannot be accessed here     AX3000   User s Manual 31    Interactive Set Up AXEL    Other DNS settings are available through the  DNS Parameters  option  Press   lt Space gt  and the dialog box below is displayed     DNS Search Domains  
251. to any PC Keyboard keys    This allows any key to be remapped to any 3270 function and or character  string     172 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 390    Select  Key Mapping  within the  Session Profile  box and press  lt Space gt  to  display the following box     Key Mapping    CANCEL       Up to 20 sequences can be remapped  from  1 to  20      To program a new sequence  or to modify an existing one  select the sequence  number and press  lt Space gt   The following dialog box is displayed     Key Mapping    Key Mapping  1     Press    4    to open the com Press the key s  you want to program  OK    CANCEL       AX3000   User s Manual 173    Installing under OS 390 AXEL    Enter the keystroke to be remapped  Then enter a character string and or press   lt Down Arrow gt  to select through a list the associated 5250 function     Key Mapping    Enter  Key Mapping  1   lt Enter gt    Press  1  to open the command list     OK CLEAR       c  Palette  This allows default emulation colors to be remapped to any color     Within the  Session Profile    box  select  Palette  and press   Space    The  following box is displayed     Palette    Color for Black    DEFAULT VALUES CANCEL       174 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 390    Select one of the 8 emulation colors and press  lt Space gt  to select another color     7 1 4   Connection Properties    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  Connection Properties  and press   lt Space gt   The fo
252. tomize the 3270 emulation  enter the AX3000 Set Up and select the  session profile   Configuration   Sessions   Session X  menu   Three groups  of parameters control 3270 emulation settings     Additional Parameters  3270 emulation behavior     User defined Sequences  mapping 3270 functions to any PC keyboard  keys     Palette  remapping emulation colors     170 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 390    a  3270 Emulation Additional Parameters    Within the  Session Profile  box  select  General Parameters  and press   lt Space gt   The following box is displayed        Display  National  Line  Blinking  Keyboard  Yes  Shift Lock  No    Enabled    Operating Mode  Cross  Follows the cursor  Yes       These parameters are     Character Set  the possible values are     National  characters are keyboard nationality dependent      Multinational     A specific keyboard nationality  American  French         Cursor Shape  Line  Half Block or Block     Cursor Style  Blinking or Steady    Type Ahead Buffer  enable disable the keyboard buffer     CAPS Key Mode  set the CAPS LOCK to behave in either of two ways    Caps Lock  only alphabetical keys are affected  To unlock this  mode press the  lt CAPS gt  key     Shift Lock  each key sends either the corresponding upper case  letter or the shifted  upper  character  To unlock this mode press  the  lt Shift gt  key     AX3000   User s Manual 171    Installing under OS 390 AXEL      Uppercase  each key send the upper characte
253. ts 512 bytes      Loading code       code loaded   Finally  the AX3000 is automatically reset and the new firmware is enabled   IMPORTANT  The AX3000 IP layer  used for the tftp protocol  does not handle  the fragmentation defragmentation process  Therefore  if a router fragments    frames  mtu lower than 600 bytes   the AX3000 will not be able to perform the  download     A 9 5   In Event of difficulties    This section describes possible problems  The error list is not exhaustive  If an  unlisted error occurs  please contact your AXEL distributor     After an error  the AX3000 should be power cycled   a  The bootp Stage    If an error occurs  the following message is displayed on the AX3000 monitor     Bootp errno              xxx   s the error number     Possible errors   0  Ethernet board not responding   1  no response to the bootp broadcast request  the bootp host is  unreachable or not correctly set up      AX3000   User s Manual 297    Appendix AXEL    b  The tftp Stage  A tftp error message can originate from either the tftp host or the AX3000     Depending on the error  the AX3000 firmware may be erased  If this happens  the firmware code will be automatically downloaded  bootp tftp protocol  the  next time the AX3000 is power cycled     Tftp Host Errors     tftp errno  xxx label      xxx   s the error number     label is the error message  This label is sent by the tftp host and is  generated by UNIX running on the tftp host     Possible errors      File not found 
254. tual desktop session the connection type is the  connection broker    The following are supported     VMWARE VDM    Citrix Xen Desktop    b  Browser Settings    For handling a virtual desktop session  authentication  list and connection  the  terminal must be first connected to a  Connection Broker      To set or to consult the connection broker setting within the  Session Profile     box  select  Browser Settings  and press   Space    The following box is  displayed     View Server Location    Security       AX3000   User s Manual 117    Installing under Windows AXEL    Enter details for locating the connection broker     IP address  or the DNS name     TCP port  generally 80 for HTTP and 443 for HTTPS      If the connection type is HTTPS  enable  SSL Tunneling     5 4 3   Available Desktop Menu    After being authenticated to the connection broker  the virtual desktop list will be  displayed  This dialog box allows this list to be customized     Desktop Parameters    Deconnected XEN Desktop Session  None       In event of only one desktop is listed  the parameter  Single Desktop Auto   Exec  allows this desktop to be automatically launched     The parameter  This Desktop Auto Exec  allows a pre defined desktop to be  automatically launched  if available in the desktop list      For  Citrix Xen Desktop  configuration  disconnected session can be listed and  eventually automatically reconnected     118 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows    5 4 4   Automat
255. tup  4096       a  Remote Control    This functionality allows an administrator to remotely take control of a terminal   The administrator can passively watch the users screen or actively take control  with his own keyboard for various support or administration purposes     The parameters are      Remote Control Allowed  yes or no      User s Authorization Required  when this parameter is set the remote  control must be accepted by the current user of the terminal      Text Mode  TCP Port   remote control only for text based session   terminal set up  telnet  5250  amp  3270      VNC Mode  TCP Port   global remote control    Password  optional  this password will be requested when the  connection is established     For more information  refer to Chapter 10 2   b  Telnet Set Up    This functionality allows the terminal set up to be addressed by a telnet client     AX3000   User s Manual 45    Interactive Set Up AXEL    The single parameter is the TCP port  4096 by default     For more information  refer to Chapter 10 3     Note Windows telnet client requires specific arguments given in Chapter 10 3   3 2 7   Password   Access to the set up menus can be controlled by a password    a  Setting the Password    Select the  Configuration   Terminal   Password  dialog box to set  change  or delete the set up password        Enter the following parameters     Enter a new password  enter a new password of maximum five  characters  or press  lt CR gt  if no password is required or to de
256. ual 59    Interactive Set Up AXEL    Select the  Configuration   Ports   Auxiliary Ports   AuxX  dialog box to  configure each auxiliary serial port     Line Parameters   Printer  9600  871 No      RDP ICA Redirection    i                         Associated Service                These parameters are      Operating Mode  four modes are available      Printer  data flow takes place one way only  from the AX3000 to the  serial peripheral device   However handshaking between the  peripheral and the AX3000 is performed      Bi directional Device  Used to control peripherals such as bar  code readers  touch screens  scales etc     ASCII to EBCDIC  this mode allows ASCII data received by the  auxiliary port to be converted to EBCDIC  AS 400  format and be  placed in the keyboard buffer  This is useful for connecting PC  based peripherals  scanners  scales  etc  to an AS 400 application   Note  the  associated service  must be set to  none  and this port  must be set as the AX3000 default auxiliary port  select the   Configuration   General   Miscellaneous  menu       Aux  Command  only for  ASCII to EBCDIC  mode   an ASCII character  string may be sent to the serial device  This is done by pressing the   Send Aux  Command  keystroke   AltGr F2 by default    Example  requesting weight data from scales     60 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up      Speed  selected from a list  from 300 to 115 200 bits per second       Format  data format is selected from a list  data l
257. ublished Application  this is a published application from the Citrix  server farm  Select the  Published Application  parameter and  manually enter the application name or press  lt F2 gt  to browse the Citrix  server farm     Note  the destination  ICA server or published application  may be left blank  In  this case when the ICA connection is established  the user must select the  destination from a list     b  ICA Browser Settings    For the  ICA Server  and  Published Application  connection types  the ICA  Browser Settings are used to dynamically build the server or application list   when  lt F2 gt  is pressed      Within the  Session Profile  box  select  ICA Browser Settings  and press    Space    The following box is displayed     Citrix Browser Localisation  TCP IP   HTTP  ica  80    Firewall    No    Other Parameters       These parameters are     Exploration Protocol  two available values  and will depend on how the  Citrix server is configured     TCP IP   HTTP  XML based protocol    TCP IP  UDP based protocol  For more information please see the Citrix Manual     IP Address or DNS Name  depending on the exploration protocol  the  ICA browsing behavior differs     98 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under Windows      TCP IP   HTTP  when this parameter is left blank  the ICA request  is sent to the DNS name  ica   Otherwise it is sent to the entered  DNS name or IP address      TCP IP  when this parameter is left blank  the ICA request is  broadcasted  
258. udio Quality  the bandwidth depends on the audio quality  For remote  connections prefer a low quality     The following parameters are only supported when the terminal is connected to  a Windows 2003 2008 server  By default  all these features are disabled  To  allow a feature set it to  X     Desktop Background  the AX3000 operator is allowed to select a  desktop background   Note  the background feature must be also allowed by the Windows  server  See Chapter 5 1 2  Sub Chapter d     Show contents of window while dragging  the AX3000 operator can  choose to display the contents of windows while resizing or dragging     Menu and window animation  the AX3000 operator is allowed to select  the animation function     Themes  the AX3000 operator is allowed to select a theme  i e  a  desktop appearance  other than the Windows Classic Theme     5 1 7   Connection Properties    Within the  Session Profile    box  select  Connection Properties and press    Space    The following box is displayed      lt Space gt        AX3000   User s Manual 95    Installing under Windows AXEL    These parameters are      Auto Connection  if this parameter is set to  yes   the connection will be  automatically established when the AX3000 is powered  Otherwise  the  user can press  lt Alt gt  lt Fx gt  to establish the connection      Auto Reconnection  if this parameter is set to  yes   a new connection is  automatically established after a disconnection  Otherwise  the user can  press  lt Alt gt  
259. ue can be changed   See  Chapter 3 2 6      We strongly advise using AxRM to open the telnet setup  see Chapter 10 1    But any telnet client could be used with the correct arguments as below     ANSI emulation  with color support      TERM value  ansi     Screen size  80x25     Scrolling mode disabled    Notes     To disable the telnet set up  set the TCP port to 0     When the telnet set up is running  the set up is also displayed on the  target terminal  The keyboard of the target terminal is locked     The AX3000 telnet server supports the keepalive mechanism  value 3  minutes   In event of network incident  the set up will be automatically  ended and the keyboard of the target terminal will be unlocked     238 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Remote Administration    The possible connection errors are     The interactive set up is already in use on the target terminal     The client telnet arguments as given above are not set     10 4   BATCH REMOTE SET UP    This feature enables an AX3000 to be set up remotely  using the remote  administration command  A text file  provided as an argument to the remote  administration command  defines the value of some or all set up parameters  It  can either be     Created with a text editor or    Obtained by a remote administration command on an AX3000 already  set up     We strongly advise using AxRM to operate with the batch setup  see Chapter  10 1   but native system commands can be used  Refer to the Chapter 8 5   Unix Linux   the 
260. umentation uses the term  nodes  to refer to both   l e   any network resource      Each node has a name  Label  which must be unique to other nodes at the  same level  but not necessarily unique within the whole network     Label syntax     Permissible characters are letters  a  z to A  Z   numbers  0  9  and the  hyphen            Label must begin by a letter and be ended by a letter or a number     The resolution is not case sensitive     The domain name of a node is the list of the labels on the path from the node to  the root of the tree  A dot is used to separate each label  Two types of host  names can be distinguished within the AX3000      A full name  one or more dots are included in the name    Example   www axel com     An incomplete name  no dots are used  The resolution procedure  concatenates another character string to this name  the default DNS  domain name   For more information see Chapter 3 1 2    Example   as400  is concatenated with  servers axel com  to create a full  name of  as400 servers axel com     A host name is only resolved if the IP address is needed   l e  to open a session  or to ping      Note  a name is resolved for each connection attempt  even if its IP address  has been obtained by a previous resolution     AX3000   User s Manual 259    Appendix AXEL    A 4 2   Resolving a Name    a  Resolution Strategy    To resolve a name  a DNS request is sent by the AX3000  A DNS request  contains the destination DNS server IP address and the name to
261. use  Note  the mouse must be enabled  See Chapter 6 1 3     Four mouse actions are possible      Left click  two possible actions are possible depending on the character  string under the mouse cursor      If the character string is a function key label  this function key is sent   keystroke emulation       Otherwise the text cursor is moved to the mouse cursor location      Double left click  two possible actions are possible depending on the  character string under the mouse cursor      If the character string is a function key label  this function key is sent   keystroke emulation       Otherwise the character string    lt Enter gt  are sent  keystroke emulation       Right click  roll up is sent  keystroke emulation       Double right click  roll down is sent  keystroke emulation      Note  identifying the character string under the mouse cursor  The character string delimiters are     Video attributes     And the following EBCDIC codes  00  40  4A  4B  4C  4D  4E  5A  5C   5D  5E  60  61  6B  6E  6F  7A  7E  CO and DO   Example for the character string  F3 Exit      Left click or double left click on  F  or  3    lt F3 gt  is sent    Double left click on  E   Exit    lt Enter gt  is sent     6 2 5   The Transparent Mode    The transparent mode function allows OS 400 application developers to send  ASCII data to the Axel terminal and or the auxiliary and logical ports     The transparent mode can be used with    A screen session  see Chapter 6 1 4   data is output to spec
262. used for both and they can be used simultaneously     3 4 3   Connecting a USB Barcode Reader    The USB barcode reader is automatically detected by the Axel terminal  A  barcode reader is treated as a keyboard  See previous chapter     3 4 4   Connecting a Mouse    A USB mouse is automatically detected by the Axel terminal  No specific  settings are required     Note  multiple mice  USB and or PS2  can be used simultaneously     3 4 5   Connecting a HUB    A USB HUB is automatically detected by the Axel terminal  No specific settings  are required     3 4 6   Connecting a Printer  a  Logical Port Attachment  When a USB printer is connected for the first time to the Axel terminal a logical    port is associated  Four logical ports are available  Usb1  Usb2  Usb3 and  Usb4     52 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Interactive Set Up    The associated logical ports are listed in the menu  Configuration   Ports     USB Logical Ports   To get information of a USB printer  select its logical port  and press  lt Enter gt   For example     Product  Associated Service    RDP ICA printer parameters       This association is maintained even if the printer is powered off  disconnected  or connected to the other USB port     Releasing a logical port is a manual operation  see Chapter below  Releasing a  Logical Port       b  Setting Up   The USB printer set up procedure is the same as a serial or parallel printer   For more information  see Chapter 3 5 2 and the following    c  Releasing a L
263. ut the Axel tty server  refer to Chapter 8 4     186 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under UNIX LINUX    c  The SSH SSH2 Protocol    An SSH connection can be considered as an encrypted telnet connection  Main  characteristics are     Dynamic allocation of pseudo terminals  ptty      System access is controlled by a  login   which is generated by the sshd  daemon  available with most versions of Unix Linux      The value of the TERM environment variable is negotiated after the login  stage   See Chapter 8 1 8 for default TERM values      Notes      The Axel SSH client is compliant with OpenSSH      The SSH2 protocol is only available for Model 80 and 85   To accept Axel SSH connections  the SSH server must support the password  authentication mechanism  In addition when the ssh  v1  protocol is used the    server must accept connections from SSH V1 clients  These two functions are  indicated in sshd_config file by     Protocol 2 1  PasswordAuthentication yes  d  Serial Ports  Aux1  Aux2        The Axel terminal supports both TCP IP and serial  RS232  connections     To establish a serial connection  the session  Protocol  must be set to  serial    Then set  Main Serial Port to a native serial ports or an USB serial port     The selected auxiliary port is set up through the  Configuration   Ports   xxx     yyy  menu  see Chapter 3 5 1      AX3000   User s Manual 187    Installing under UNIX LINUX AXEL    8 1 3   Selecting the Emulation    The available emulations are 
264. ve  two names  i e  its original name AND axrmserv     20 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Initial Power On    Method 3   If  axrmserv  cannot be resolved  as a final attempt the terminal assumes  AXRM resides on the same PC as the DHCP server     Method 4   Only used when the location  IP address or name  and the TCP port of  the AxRM machine are specified within the AX3000 Set Up  See Chapter  3 7 2   This is not viable for setting up brand new terminals  as required  AxrM PC data to be already entered in the terminal setup     The IP address of the AxRM server and the location method used is shown on  the status line           Auto Conf    DHCP  aaa bbb ccc ddd   AxRM  1   www xxx yyy Zzzz nnnn              The terminal sends an  auto configuration  request to AxRM every 5 seconds  If  no response is received after 10 attempts the terminal starts the mechanism  again  i e  from stage 1     This loop stops when either AxRM responds or if a user presses any key on the  keyboard  causing the normal interactive quick setup to run     2 2 4   Stage 4  Receiving the firmware download    A dialog box on the terminal screen provides the status  From this stage the  mechanism cannot be aborted     Note that firmware downloading may not have been specified by AxRM  in  which case the procedure passes directly to stage 5     AX3000   User s Manual 21       Initial Power On AXEL    The dialog box is as shown     AUTO CONFIGURATION    Network detection    IP Address   DHCP Server  AxRM S
265. x is displayed     3 3 1    TSE  rdp   or  Citrix  Ica     Virtual Desktop  Session Types       Graphical mode session for connections to Windows  TSE servers  Citrix  Servers or virtual machines      For more information refer to Chapter 5    3 3 2    VNC  Session Type   Graphical mode session for connections to Unix Linux   For more information refer to Chapter 8 2    3 3 3    5250  Session Type   Text mode session for connections to AS 400     For more information refer to Chapter 6     AX3000   User s Manual 49    Interactive Set Up AXEL    3 3 4    3270  Session Type    Text mode session for connections to OS 390   For more information refer to Chapter 7     3 3 5    Text Emulation  Session Type    Network  telnet  ssh and tty protocols  or serial  aux1 and aux2 ports  text  mode sessions are generally used for Unix Linux connections     For more information  refer to Chapter 8 1     3 3 6    None  Session Type    The session is no longer available for the user   3 3 7   Duplicating Session Settings  The settings of a  source  session may be duplicated to a  destination  session     In the  Configuration   Sessions  menu  select the source session and press   lt Ctrl gt  lt C gt   Then select the destination session and press  lt Ctrl gt  lt V gt      After confirmation  the source session settings are applied to the destination  session     3 4   USB MANAGEMENT    3 4 1   Specifications    Technical specifications     Supported speeds     All models  Low speed  1 5 Mbit
266. xel options see chapter A 6 3    A 6 2   Adding an Axel option with the Microsoft DHCP Server        add an Axel DHCP option with Microsoft s DHCP server see below    1   Launch the DHCP utility     Right click on the IP address of the DHCP server and select    Set Predefined  Options    and select  Add     2   The following dialog box is displayed     Option Type a Lx   Class  Global  Name     Data type   be    gt     Aray  Code     Description                    Complete the fields as follows     Name    User definable  for example    Axel Autoconf    Data Type    mandatory  string    Code    User definable  select unused number between 231 and 240    Description    User definable  for example  Axel vender option for auto   configuration      AX3000   User s Manual 285    Appendix AXEL    Click    OK    to exit this box and        again to exit the former box     3   In the left panel select  Server Options    then right click    Configure Options     Within the available options    tick    the new Axel entry and enter IP and TCP port  details as below as    string value     For example        Server Options          General   Advanced            Available Options   Description 4             1 075 StreetT alk Servers List of Stree  O 076 StreetT alk Directory Assistance  STDA  Servers List of STD    231 Axel Autoconf Axel vender      1 243 Classless Static Routes        Destination  w              m Data entry    String value     aximserv 192 168 1 148080                Can
267. ys        3270 Functions PC AT keyboard  Fast cursor move to right  lt Alt gt  lt right arrow gt   Fast cursor move to left                                                                                   lt Alt gt  lt left arrow gt   Backspace  lt BackSP gt   Tab  lt Tab gt   BackTab  lt Shift gt  lt Tab gt   Home  lt Home gt   Newline  lt Enter gt   EOF  lt End gt   Erase Input  lt Alt gt  lt End gt   Insert mode  lt Inser gt   Delete  lt Del gt   Duplicate  lt Shift gt  lt Inser gt   Field Mark  lt Shift gt  lt Home gt   System  lt Alt gt  lt Syst gt  or  lt Shift gt  lt Esc gt   Attention  lt Alt gt  lt Pause gt  or  lt Esc gt   Reset   Ctrl left gt   Clear  lt Pause gt   PA1  lt PgUp gt   PA2  lt PgDn gt   PA3  lt Shift gt  lt PgUp gt   PF1  lt F1 gt   PF13  lt Shift gt  lt F1 gt  or  lt Esc gt   Enter   Right Ctrl   or   Num Entr gt     Record     Alt Gr gt  lt F4 gt     Exec     Alt Gr gt  lt F5 gt   Euro Symbol   Alt Gr     E    Rule   Alt Gr     F12            7 2 3   Programming Function Keys  Macro Feature     The Axel 3270 emulation allows function keys to be programmed  For example    a series of keystrokes can be recorded and played back by pressing a single  key     178 AX3000   User s Manual    AXEL Installing under OS 390    The recorded data is stored in non volatile memory so is not affected by  switching off     Recorded keystrokes can be assigned to any of the twelve function keys   lt F1 gt   to  lt   12 gt       a  Programming a Function Key    To reco
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Instruction Manual  Sony A6 Large-size colour print pack  RHDW14SS - Russell Hobbs  Descargar más información sobre Multiherramienta Alien II  OM, Gardena, 1254, 1255, V1, V3, Pozzetto per valvole, 2014-08  KB 289_GB  GUÍA DEL USUARIO  ISTRUZIONI D`USO  March 2009 - Western Illinois Amateur Radio Club  Samsung UN32D5550RF 32형    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file